Mercedes - C 160 - Owners Manual - 2016 - 2016

Your Operator's Manuals Digitally - in the vehicle Get to grips with the content of the Digital Operator's Manual in the multimedia system fitted in your vehicle (under the "Vehicle" menu item). Printed manual - in the vehicle In addition to the vehicle Operator's Manual, the complete additional operating instructions for your multimedia system are also available from your Mercedes-Benz Service Center. Digitally - via the Internet You will find the Operator's Manual on your Mercedes-Benz homepage. Digitally - as an App The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available for free in the Apple App Store and on Google Play. Apple® iOS AndroidTM C-Class É2055841505QËÍ 2055841505 Order no. P205 0070 13 Part no. 205 584 15 05 Edition B 2016 C-Class Operator's Manual Operator's Manual Symbols Registered trademarks: RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- tooth SIG Inc. is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trademarks of Daimler AG. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. RBurmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are registered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: RDTS™ This symbol tells you where you can find (Y page) more information about a topic. This symbol indicates a warning or an YY instruction that is continued on the next page. Dis‐ This text indicates a message on the play multifunction display/multimedia display. ~ This symbol tells you that you can find further information in the Digital Operator's Manual. Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Editorial office ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. This symbol indicates an instruction X that must be followed. Several of these symbols in succession X indicate an instruction with several steps. As at 08.04.2015 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. This Operator's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: RDigital Operator's Manual RPrinted Operator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Operator's Manual: Digital form inside the vehicle The Digital Operator's Manual provides comprehensive and specifically adapted information on your vehicle's equipment and multimedia system. It contains informative animations, individual language settings and an intuitive search function. Booklet inside the vehicle In addition to this manual and the aforementioned digital media, you also have the option to obtain a comprehensive printed version of the Supplement for your multi- media system from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Digital form via the Internet The Operator's Manual on the Internet provides easy access to all information regarding your vehicle and multimedia system. It also provides helpful animations, interesting background information and a wide array of search options. Digital form as an App Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you can view all the information on your vehicle and multimedia system via mobile Internet or download it independently of network access. Available for smartphones or tablets. Apple® iOS Android™ Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App may not yet be available in your country. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2055841505 É2055841505QËÍ 2 Contents Index ....................................................... 3 Introduction ......................................... 27 Digital Operator's Manual .................. 25 At a glance ........................................... 35 Safety ................................................... 44 Opening and closing ........................... 81 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 104 Lights and windshield wipers .......... 118 Climate control ................................. 129 Driving and parking .......................... 145 On-board computer and displays .... 235 Multimedia system ........................... 298 Stowage and features ...................... 308 Maintenance and care ...................... 330 Breakdown assistance ..................... 342 Wheels and tires ............................... 360 Technical data ................................... 386 Index 1, 2, 3 ... 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) .................................................. 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) 360° camera Cleaning ......................................... Display in the multimedia system .. Function/notes ............................. 198 339 212 210 A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 256 Function/notes ................................ 68 Important safety notes .................... 68 Warning lamp ................................. 289 Accident Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 61 Activating media mode General notes ................................ 306 Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification ................. 133 Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 248 Display message ............................ 276 Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 248 Display message ............................ 275 Function/information .................... 222 Active Parking Assist Canceling ....................................... 206 Detecting parking spaces .............. 203 Display message ............................ 276 Exiting a parking space .................. 205 Function/notes ............................. 202 Important safety notes .................. 202 Parking .......................................... 204 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 76 Adaptive Brake Assist Function/notes ................................ 72 Adaptive Damping System Function/notes ............................. 197 Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 197 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ............................ 268 Function/notes ............................. 120 Switching on/off ........................... 121 Additional speedometer ................... 251 Additives (engine oil) ........................ 392 Address book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Adjusting the volume Multimedia system ........................ 299 Air bags Deployment ..................................... 58 Display message ............................ 265 Front air bag (driver, front passenger) ....................................... 52 Important safety notes .................... 51 Introduction ..................................... 51 Knee bag .......................................... 53 Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... 54 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... 47 Side impact air bag .......................... 53 Window curtain air bag .................... 54 Air vents Important safety notes .................. 143 Rear ............................................... 144 Setting ........................................... 143 Setting the center air vents ........... 144 Setting the side air vents ............... 144 Air-conditioning system see Climate control AIRMATIC Display message ............................ 274 Function/notes ............................. 196 AIRPANEL Cleaning instructions ..................... 339 Alarm ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79 Switching off (ATA) .......................... 79 Switching the function on/off (ATA) ................................................ 79 Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) 3 4 Index AMG Adaptive sport suspension system ................................................ 197 Performance Seat .......................... 108 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 252 AMG sports exhaust system ............ 152 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-Theft Alarm system see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Armrest Stowage compartment .................. 309 Ashtray ............................................... 318 Assistance display (on-board computer) .................................................. 246 Assistance menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 247 ASSYST PLUS Displaying a service message ........ 334 Driving abroad ............................... 335 Hiding a service message .............. 334 Resetting the service interval display ................................................ 334 Service message ............................ 333 Special service requirements ......... 334 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Activating/deactivating ................... 79 Function ........................................... 79 Switching off the alarm .................... 79 ATTENTION ASSIST Activating/deactivating ................. 248 Display message ............................ 274 Function/notes ............................. 214 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop AUTO lights Display message ............................ 267 see Lights Automatic car wash (care) ............... 335 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ stop function) .................................... 151 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) .......................... 150 Automatic headlamp mode .............. 118 Automatic transmission Accelerator pedal position ............. Changing gear ............................... DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... Display message ............................ Double-clutch function .................. Drive program ................................ Drive program display .................... Driving tips .................................... DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. Emergency running mode .............. Engaging drive position .................. Engaging neutral ............................ Engaging park position automatically ............................................... Engaging reverse gear ................... Engaging the park position ............ Gliding mode ................................. Kickdown ....................................... Manual shifting .............................. Oil temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Overview ........................................ Problem (malfunction) ................... Pulling away ................................... Rocking the vehicle free ................ Starting the engine ........................ Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... Transmission positions .................. Automatic transmission emergency mode ....................................... 158 158 156 282 158 159 157 158 154 164 157 156 156 156 156 159 159 161 252 155 164 149 159 148 161 157 158 164 B Back button ....................................... 299 Backup lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 124 Bag hook ............................................ 313 BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 68 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist PLUS with CrossTraffic Assist) Function/notes ................................ 69 Important safety notes .................... 69 Battery (high-voltage) see High-voltage battery Index Battery (SmartKey) Checking .......................................... 84 Important safety notes .................... 84 Replacing ......................................... 84 Battery (vehicle) Charging ........................................ 350 Display message ............................ 269 Important safety notes .................. 347 Jump starting ................................. 352 Belt see Seat belts Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ 248 Display message ............................ 276 Notes/function .............................. 216 see Active Blind Spot Assist Bluetooth® Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 306 Searching for a mobile phone ........ 306 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Telephony ...................................... 305 Box (trunk) ......................................... 314 Brake Assist see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Display message ............................ 261 Notes ............................................. 392 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake pedal Pedal resistance/pedal travel .......... 45 Brakes ABS .................................................. 68 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72 BAS .................................................. 68 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 69 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 392 Display message ............................ 256 EBD .................................................. 76 High-performance brake system .... 183 Hill start assist ............................... 150 HOLD function ............................... 194 Important safety notes .................. 182 Maintenance .................................. 183 Parking brake ................................ 178 RBS warning lamp .......................... 288 Recuperative Brake System ............. 45 Riding tips ...................................... 182 Warning lamp ................................. 288 Breakdown Where will I find...? ........................ 342 see Flat tire see Towing away Brightness control (instrument cluster lighting) ................................... 35 Buttons on the steering wheel ......... 236 C California Important notice for retail customers and lessees .......................... 28 Calling up a malfunction see Display messages Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system ........................ 302 Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system ........................ 302 Car see Vehicle Care 360° camera ................................. 339 AIRPANEL ...................................... 339 Car wash ........................................ 335 Carpets .......................................... 341 Display ........................................... 340 Exhaust pipe .................................. 340 Exterior lights ................................ 338 Gear or selector lever .................... 340 General notes ................................ 335 Interior ........................................... 340 Matte finish ................................... 337 Paint .............................................. 337 Plastic trim .................................... 340 Power washer ................................ 336 Rear view camera .......................... 339 Roof lining ...................................... 341 Seat belt ........................................ 341 Seat cover ..................................... 341 Sensors ......................................... 339 5 6 Index Steering wheel ............................... 340 Trim pieces .................................... 340 Washing by hand ........................... 336 Wheels ........................................... 338 Windows ........................................ 338 Wiper blades .................................. 338 Wooden trim .................................. 340 Cargo tie down rings ......................... 313 CD see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 CD player (on-board computer) ........ 244 Center console Lower section ............................ 40, 41 Upper section .................................. 39 Central locking Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 81 Changing bulbs High-beam headlamps ................... 124 Low-beam headlamps .................... 123 Opening and closing the side trim panels ............................................ 124 Reversing lamps ............................ 124 Turn signals (front) ......................... 124 Turn signals (rear) .......................... 124 Changing the media source ............. 243 Charge-air pressure (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... 252 Charging see Charging the high-voltage battery (important safety notes) Charging cable Connecting .................................... 173 Controls ......................................... 171 Important safety notes .................. 171 Indicator lamp ................................ 172 Removing ....................................... 173 Storing ........................................... 171 Warming up ................................... 170 Charging the high-voltage battery (important safety notes) ................... 168 Child Restraint system .............................. 63 Child seat Forward-facing restraint system ...... 66 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ............................................ 64 On the front-passenger seat ............ 65 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 65 Top Tether ....................................... 64 Child-proof locks Important safety notes .................... 66 Rear doors ....................................... 67 Children Special seat belt retractor ............... 62 Cigarette lighter ................................ 319 Cleaning Mirror turn signal ........................... 339 Climate control 3-zone automatic control panel ..... 131 Control panel for automatic climate control (1 zone) .................... 130 Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control ..................... 130 Controlling automatically ............... 133 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 133 Cooling with air dehumidification (multimedia system) ...................... 303 Defrosting the windows ................. 136 Defrosting the windshield .............. 135 ECO start/stop function (3-zone automatic climate control) ............. 132 General notes ................................ 129 Immediate pre-entry climate control ................................................. 143 Indicator lamp ................................ 133 Ionization ....................................... 140 Ionization (multimedia system) ...... 303 Notes on using the automatic climate control .................................. 132 Overview ........................................ 302 Overview of systems ...................... 129 Perfume atomizer .......................... 138 Perfume atomizer (multimedia system) .......................................... 303 Pre-entry climate control (via key) (multimedia system) ...................... 303 Pre-entry climate control at departure time ............................... 142 Pre-entry climate control at departure time (multimedia system) ............................................... 303 Pre-entry climate control via key ... 141 Index Problem with the rear window defroster ........................................ 137 Problems with cooling with air dehumidification ............................ 133 Rear control panel ......................... 131 Refrigerant ..................................... 393 Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 394 Setting the air distribution ............. 134 Setting the air vents ...................... 143 Setting the airflow ......................... 135 Setting the climate mode ............... 134 Setting the climate mode (multimedia system) ............................... 303 Setting the temperature ................ 134 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ............................................ 137 Switching on/off ........................... 132 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 137 Switching the rear window defroster on/off ............................ 136 Switching the synchronization function on and off ........................ 135 Synchronization function (multimedia system) ............................... 304 Climate control settings Multimedia system ........................ 302 Climate control system Climate control (3-zone automatic climate control) ............................. 132 Cockpit Overview .......................................... 35 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Activating/deactivating ................. 247 Display message ............................ 261 Operation/notes .............................. 70 COMAND display Cleaning ......................................... 340 Combination switch .......................... 119 Connecting a USB device see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Consumption statistics (on-board computer) .......................................... 240 Controller ........................................... 299 Convenience box ............................... 314 Convenience closing feature .............. 96 Convenience opening feature ............ 96 Coolant (engine) Checking the level ......................... 333 Display message ............................ 268 Displaying the temperature (onboard computer) ............................ 246 Filling capacity ............................... 393 Important safety notes .................. 392 Temperature display in the instrument cluster .................................. 236 Warning lamp ................................. 293 Cooling see Climate control Copyright ............................................. 34 Cornering light function Display message ............................ 267 Function/notes ............................. 120 Crosswind Assist ................................. 76 Cruise control Cruise control lever ....................... 185 Deactivating ................................... 186 Display message ............................ 279 Driving system ............................... 185 Function/notes ............................. 185 General notes ................................ 185 Important safety notes .................. 185 Setting a speed .............................. 186 Storing and maintaining current speed ............................................. 185 Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed .......... 186 Cup holder Center console .............................. 316 Important safety notes .................. 316 Rear compartment ......................... 317 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ..................................................... 32 Customer Relations Department ....... 32 D Data see Technical data Data carrier Selecting ........................................ 244 Daytime running lamps Display message ............................ 267 Function/notes ............................. 118 7 8 Index Switching on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 250 Declarations of conformity ................. 31 Diagnostics connection ...................... 31 Digital Operator's Manual Help ................................................. 25 Introduction ..................................... 25 Digital speedometer ......................... 241 DIRECT SELECT lever Automatic transmission ................. 156 Display see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Display message Hybrid drive system ....................... 272 Display messages ASSYST PLUS ................................ 333 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 255 Driving systems ............................. 274 Engine ............................................ 268 General notes ................................ 255 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 255 Introduction ................................... 255 Lights ............................................. 267 Safety systems .............................. 256 SmartKey ....................................... 285 Tires ............................................... 280 Vehicle ........................................... 282 Distance recorder ............................. 239 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 295 Distance warning function Function/notes ................................ 71 DISTRONIC PLUS Activating ....................................... 188 Activation conditions ..................... 188 Cruise control lever ....................... 188 Deactivating ................................... 191 Display message ............................ 277 Displays in the instrument cluster .. 191 Driving tips .................................... 192 Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 189 Function/notes ............................. 186 Important safety notes .................. 187 Setting a speed .............................. 190 Setting the specified minimum distance ......................................... 190 Stopping ........................................ 189 with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............................................... 192 Doors Automatic locking (switch) ............... 89 Central locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ....................................... 81 Control panel ................................... 43 Display message ............................ 284 Emergency locking ........................... 89 Emergency unlocking ....................... 89 Important safety notes .................... 87 Opening (from inside) ...................... 88 Drinking and driving ......................... 180 Drive program Automatic transmission ................. 159 SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 253 Drive programs Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 157 Driver's door see Doors Driving abroad Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 335 Driving Assistance PLUS package ... 219 Driving on flooded roads .................. 184 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 68 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 76 Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 72 BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 68 BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist ............................................... 69 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS ................................................ 70 Distance warning function ............... 71 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ............................................. 76 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 73 Important safety information ........... 68 Overview .......................................... 67 PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 77 Recuperative Brake System ............. 45 STEER CONTROL ............................. 78 Driving system RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ........................................ 195 Index Driving systems 360°camera .................................. Active Blind Spot Assist ................. Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ Active Parking Assist ..................... AIRMATIC ...................................... AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ Blind Spot Assist ............................ Cruise control ................................ Display message ............................ DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... Driving Assistance Plus package ... HOLD function ............................... Lane Keeping Assist ...................... Lane Tracking package .................. PARKTRONIC ................................. Rear view camera .......................... Traffic Sign Assist .......................... Driving tips AMG ceramic brakes ..................... Automatic transmission ................. Brakes ........................................... Break-in period .............................. DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... Downhill gradient ........................... Drinking and driving ....................... Driving in winter ............................. Driving on flooded roads ................ Driving on wet roads ...................... Exhaust check ............................... Fuel ................................................ General .......................................... Hydroplaning ................................. Icy road surfaces ........................... Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ....................................... Snow chains .................................. Subjecting brakes to a load ........... The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ..... Wet road surface ........................... DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 210 219 222 202 196 197 214 216 185 274 186 192 219 194 218 216 199 206 215 183 158 182 145 192 182 180 184 184 184 180 180 179 184 184 182 363 182 145 182 244 298 DYNAMIC SELECT switch Automatic transmission ................. 154 Climate control (dual-zone automatic climate control) .................... 132 PLUG-IN HYBRID operation ............ 229 E EASY-ENTRY feature Function/notes ............................. 112 EASY-EXIT feature Function/notes ............................. 112 EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 314 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Display message ............................ 258 Function/notes ................................ 76 ECO display Function/notes ............................. 180 On-board computer ....................... 240 ECO start/stop function Automatic engine start .................. 151 Automatic engine switch-off .......... 150 Deactivating/activating ................. 151 General information ....................... 150 Important safety notes .................. 150 Introduction ................................... 150 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. 61 Emergency release Driver's door .................................... 89 Trunk ............................................... 94 Vehicle ............................................. 89 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation ......................................... 58 Emissions control Service and warranty information .... 28 Engine Check Engine warning lamp ........... 293 Display message ............................ 268 ECO start/stop function ................ 150 Engine number ............................... 388 Irregular running ............................ 153 Jump-starting ................................. 352 Starting (important safety notes) ... 148 9 10 Index Starting problems .......................... 153 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ....................................... 148 Starting via smartphone ................ 149 Starting with the Start/Stop button ................................................. 148 Switching off .................................. 177 Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 357 Engine electronics Problem (malfunction) ................... 153 Engine oil Adding ........................................... 332 Additives ........................................ 392 Checking the oil level ..................... 331 Checking the oil level using the dipstick .......................................... 332 Display message ............................ 270 Filling capacity ............................... 391 General notes ................................ 391 Notes about oil grades ................... 391 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 331 Temperature (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 252 Entering an address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 253 Characteristics ................................. 73 Crosswind Assist ............................. 76 Deactivating/activating (button in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 74 Deactivating/activating (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) ................. 74 Deactivating/activating (onboard computer, except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 247 Display message ............................ 256 Function/notes ................................ 73 General notes .................................. 73 Important safety information ........... 73 Trailer stabilization ........................... 76 Warning lamp ................................. 290 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...................................................... 73 Exhaust see Exhaust pipe Exhaust check ................................... Exhaust pipe Cleaning ......................................... Exhaustive discharging (high-voltage battery) ....................................... Exterior lighting Cleaning ......................................... see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting ....................................... Dipping (automatic) ....................... Folding in/out (automatically) ....... Folding in/out (electrically) ........... Out of position (troubleshooting) ... Setting ........................................... Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... Storing the parking position .......... Eyeglasses compartment ................. 180 340 349 338 113 114 114 114 114 114 116 115 309 F Favorites Overview ........................................ 301 Features ............................................. 316 Filler cap see Refueling Flat tire Changing a wheel/mounting the spare wheel ................................... 379 MOExtended tires .......................... 343 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 343 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 344 Floormats ........................................... 329 Frequencies Mobile phone ................................. 386 Two-way radio ................................ 386 Fuel Additives ........................................ 390 Consumption statistics .................. 240 Displaying the current consumption ................................................ 240 Displaying the range ...................... 240 Driving tips .................................... 180 Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 390 Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Grade (gasoline) ............................ 389 Important safety notes .................. 389 Index Problem (malfunction) ................... 168 Refueling ........................................ 164 Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 389 Fuel filler flap Opening ......................................... 165 Fuel level Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...................................... 240 Fuel tank Capacity ........................................ 389 Problem (malfunction) ................... 168 Fuses Allocation chart ..................... 357, 359 Before changing ............................. 357 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 357 Fuse box in the engine compartment .............................................. 358 Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell .......................................... 358 Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 359 Important safety notes .................. 357 G G-Meter (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 252 Garage door opener Clearing the memory ..................... 329 General notes ................................ 326 Important safety notes .................. 327 Opening/closing the garage door .. 329 Problems when programming ........ 328 Programming (button in the rearview mirror) ................................... 327 Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 328 Gear indicator (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 252 Genuine parts ...................................... 27 Glove box ........................................... 309 Google™ Local Search see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 H Handbrake see Parking brake HANDS-FREE ACCESS .......................... 92 Handwriting recognition Switching text reader function on/off ............................................ 301 Touchpad ....................................... 300 Hazard warning lamps ...................... 120 Head restraints Adjusting (electrically) ................... 107 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 107 Adjusting (rear) .............................. 107 Adjusting the fore-and-aft position manually ................................. 107 General notes ................................ 106 Important safety notes .................. 106 Installing/removing (rear) .............. 107 Head-up display Adjusting the brightness ................ 250 Displays and operating .................. 238 Function/notes ............................. 238 Important safety notes .................. 238 Selecting displays .......................... 249 Setting the position ....................... 250 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 116 Headlamps Cleaning system (notes) ................ 393 Fogging up ..................................... 121 see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control High beam flasher ............................. 119 High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120 Changing bulbs .............................. 124 Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 119 High-voltage battery Battery care ................................... 170 Charging (charging station) ............ 174 Charging (mains socket) ................ 171 Charging (wallbox) ......................... 173 Charging cable warming ................ 170 Cruise range .................................. 170 Energy consumption ...................... 170 General notes .................................. 45 Method of operation ...................... 169 Outside temperatures .................... 170 Overvoltage protection .................. 170 11 12 Index Problems with the charging process ................................................. 175 Terms of use .................................. 170 Vehicle fire ....................................... 45 Hill start assist .................................. 150 HOLD function Activating ....................................... 195 Activation conditions ..................... 194 Deactivating ................................... 195 Display message ............................ 277 Function/notes ............................. 194 General notes ................................ 194 Home address see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Hood Closing ........................................... 331 Display message ............................ 284 Important safety notes .................. 330 Opening ......................................... 330 Horn ...................................................... 35 HUD see Head-up display Hybrid drive system Automatic switch off ........................ 44 Danger of electric shock .................. 44 Display message ............................ 272 General notes .................................. 44 High-voltage battery ........................ 45 Important safety notes .................... 44 Manual switch off ............................ 44 Opening the hood ............................ 45 Warning lamp ................................. 288 Hybrid vehicles Important safety notes .................... 44 Hydroplaning ..................................... 184 I Ignition lock see Key positions Immobilizer .......................................... 79 Indicator and warning lamps COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS .............................................. 295 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Indicators see Turn signals Insect protection on the radiator .... 331 Instrument cluster Overview .......................................... 36 Warning and indicator lamps ........... 36 Instrument cluster lighting .............. 235 Interior lighting ................................. 121 Control ........................................... 122 Overview ........................................ 121 Reading lamp ................................. 121 iPod® see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 J Jack Using ............................................. 381 Jump starting (engine) ...................... 352 K Key positions SmartKey ....................................... 146 Start/Stop button .......................... 146 KEYLESS-GO Convenience closing feature ............ 97 Deactivation ..................................... 82 Locking ............................................ 82 Removing the Start/Stop button ... 147 Start function ................................... 83 Unlocking ......................................... 82 Kickdown Driving tips .................................... 159 Manual gearshifting ....................... 163 Knee bag .............................................. 53 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. Activating/deactivating (onboard computer) ............................ Display message ............................ Function/information .................... see Active Lane Keeping Assist 219 248 275 218 Index Lane Tracking package ..................... 216 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 253 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors ................................................ 64 License plate lamp (display message) ................................................... 267 Light function, active Display message ............................ 267 Light sensor (display message) ....... 267 Lights Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 120 Automatic headlamp mode ............ 118 Cornering light function ................. 120 Fogged up headlamps .................... 121 General notes ................................ 118 Hazard warning lamps ................... 120 High beam flasher .......................... 119 High-beam headlamps ................... 119 Light switch ................................... 118 Low-beam headlamps .................... 119 Parking lamps ................................ 119 Rear fog lamp ................................ 119 Setting exterior lighting ................. 118 Standing lamps .............................. 119 Switching the daytime running lamps on/off (on-board computer) ............................................. 250 Turn signals ................................... 119 see Interior lighting Loading guidelines ............................ 308 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ........................................ 89 Emergency locking ........................... 89 From inside (central locking button) .................................................. 88 Locking centrally see Central locking Low-beam headlamps Changing bulbs .............................. 123 Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Lumbar support Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 108 M M+S tires ............................................ 362 Malfunction message see Display messages Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 337 Maximum charge current Setting (charging cable) ................. 172 Setting (on-board computer) .......... 248 mbrace Call priority .................................... 323 Display message ............................ 261 Downloading destinations (COMAND) ..................................... 323 Downloading routes ....................... 326 Emergency call .............................. 320 General notes ................................ 320 Geo fencing ................................... 326 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 325 MB info call button ........................ 322 Remote fault diagnosis .................. 325 Remote vehicle locking .................. 324 Roadside Assistance button .......... 321 Search & Send ............................... 323 Self-test ......................................... 320 Speed alert .................................... 326 System .......................................... 320 Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 326 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 324 Mechanical key Function/notes ................................ 83 General notes .................................. 83 Inserting .......................................... 83 Locking vehicle ................................ 89 Removing ......................................... 83 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 89 Memory card (audio) ......................... 244 Memory function Seats, steering wheel, exterior mirrors ........................................... 116 Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive 360°camera .................................. 210 Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 219 Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 222 Active Parking Assist ..................... 202 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 214 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 216 13 14 Index DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186 DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 192 General notes ................................ 185 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 218 PARKTRONIC ................................. 199 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... 60 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. 61 Rear view camera .......................... 206 Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 215 Message memory (on-board computer) .................................................. 255 Messages see Display messages see Warning and indicator lamps Mirror turn signal Cleaning ......................................... 339 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) Mobile phone Connecting (Bluetooth® interface) .............................................. 305 Connecting another mobile phone ............................................ 306 Frequencies ................................... 386 Installation ..................................... 386 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 245 Transmission output (maximum) .... 386 Modifying the programming (SmartKey) ........................................... 83 MOExtended tires .............................. 343 Mounting wheels Lowering the vehicle ...................... 384 Mounting a new wheel ................... 383 Preparing the vehicle ..................... 380 Raising the vehicle ......................... 381 Removing a wheel .......................... 383 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ........................................ 380 MP3 Operation ....................................... 244 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Multifunction display Function/notes ............................. 237 Permanent display ......................... 251 Multifunction steering wheel Operating the on-board computer .. 236 Overview .......................................... 38 Multimedia system Switching on and off ...................... 299 Music files see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 N Navigation Menu (on-board computer) ............ 241 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ....................................................... 145 O Occupant Classification System (OCS) Conditions ....................................... Faults ............................................... Operation ......................................... System self-test ............................... Occupant safety Air bags ........................................... Automatic measures after an accident ................................................. Children in the vehicle ..................... Important safety notes .................... Introduction to the restraint system .................................................. Occupant Classification System (OCS) ............................................... PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ............................................... Pets in the vehicle ........................... PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) ............................... PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) .............. Restraint system warning lamp ........ Seat belt .......................................... 54 58 54 56 51 61 62 46 46 54 47 67 60 61 46 48 Index OCS Conditions ....................................... 54 Faults ............................................... 58 Operation ......................................... 54 System self-test ............................... 56 Odometer ........................................... 239 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer AMG menu ..................................... 252 Assistance graphic menu ............... 246 Assistance menu ........................... 247 Display messages .......................... 255 Displaying a service message ........ 334 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 191 Factory settings ............................. 252 G-Meter ......................................... 252 Head-up display ............................. 238 HYBRID menu ................................ 248 Important safety notes .................. 235 Instrument cluster menu ............... 251 Lights menu ................................... 250 Media menu ................................... 243 Menu overview .............................. 239 Message memory .......................... 255 Navigation menu ............................ 241 Operation ....................................... 236 RACETIMER ................................... 253 Radio menu ................................... 243 Service menu ................................. 246 Settings menu ............................... 247 Standard display ............................ 239 Telephone menu ............................ 245 Trip menu ...................................... 239 Video DVD operation ..................... 244 Online access to the vehicle Data protection .............................. 176 Functions ....................................... 176 General information ....................... 176 Internet .......................................... 176 Opening and closing the side trim panels ................................................. 124 Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ............ 166 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Important safety notes .................... 30 Operating system see On-board computer Operation Digital Operator's Manual ................ 25 Operator's Manual Overview .......................................... 28 Vehicle equipment ........................... 28 Outside temperature display ........... 236 Overhead control panel ...................... 42 Override feature Rear side windows ........................... 67 P Paddle shifters see Steering wheel paddle shifters Paint code number ............................ 387 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 337 Panic alarm .......................................... 46 Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Important safety notes .................... 98 Operating ....................................... 100 Operating the roller sunblinds for the sliding sunroof ......................... 101 Problem (malfunction) ................... 103 Rain closing feature ....................... 101 Reversing feature ............................. 99 Parking ............................................... 177 Important safety notes .................. 177 Parking brake ................................ 178 Position of exterior mirror, frontpassenger side ............................... 115 Rear view camera .......................... 206 Switching off the engine ................ 177 see PARKTRONIC Parking aid see 360° camera see Active Parking Assist see Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera Parking assistance see PARKTRONIC Parking brake Display message ............................ 258 Electric parking brake .................... 178 Warning lamp ................................. 292 15 16 Index Parking lamps Switching on/off ........................... 119 PARKTRONIC Deactivating/activating ................. 201 Driving system ............................... 199 Function/notes ............................. 199 Important safety notes .................. 199 Problem (malfunction) ................... 202 Range of the sensors ..................... 199 Warning display ............................. 200 PASSENGER AIR BAG Display message ............................ 265 Indicator lamps ................................ 47 Problems (malfunction) .................. 265 Perfume atomizer Operating ....................................... 138 Problem (malfunction) ................... 140 Setting the perfume intensity (multimedia system) ...................... 303 Vial ................................................ 138 Pets in the vehicle ............................... 67 Phone book see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 340 PLUG-IN HYBRID operating Electrical energy generated ........... 228 PLUG-IN HYBRID operation Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) ....................... 232 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO start/stop function) ....................... 231 Charge level of the high-voltage battery ........................................... 227 Displaying the total range and electric range ................................. 228 Driving tips .................................... 230 DYNAMIC SELECT switch .............. 229 ECO start/stop function ................ 231 Electric motor (power display) ....... 225 Electrical energy generated (Audio 20) ...................................... 228 Electrical energy generated (COMAND) ..................................... 228 Energy flow display ........................ 227 Fuel consumption .......................... 228 Fuel consumption (Audio 20) ......... 228 Fuel consumption (COMAND) ........ General notes ................................ Haptic accelerator pedal ................ High-voltage battery (condition of charge) .......................................... HYBRID menu ................................ Important safety notes .................. Instrument cluster (power display) ............................................... Noiseless start ............................... Operating (on-board computer) ..... Operating mode ............................. Overrun mode ................................ Parking .......................................... Power display (electric motor) ....... Problems with SRS (supplemental restraint system) ............................ Problems with the combustion engine ............................................ Problems with the hybrid drive system ........................................... Problems with the Recuperative Brake System ................................ Pulling away ................................... READY display ............................... Recuperative Brake System ........... Resetting the values (Audio 20) ..... Resetting the values (COMAND) .... Route-based operating strategy ..... Shifting manually ........................... Starting .......................................... When the vehicle is stationary ....... Power washers .................................. Power windows see Side windows Pre-entry climate control (via SmartKey) Problems (malfunctions) ................ Pre-entry climate control at departure time General notes ................................ Pre-entry climate control at time of departure Setting departure time ................... Pre-entry climate control via key General notes ................................ 228 224 230 227 248 225 225 228 227 226 232 232 225 234 233 234 233 228 228 225 228 228 232 229 228 230 336 142 142 143 141 Index Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey Activating/deactivating ................. 141 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Display message ............................ 262 Operation ......................................... 60 PRE-SAFE® Brake Activating/deactivating ................. 247 Display message ............................ 262 Function/notes ................................ 77 Important safety notes .................... 77 Warning lamp ................................. 295 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection PLUS) Operation ......................................... 61 Protection against theft ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 79 Immobilizer ...................................... 79 Protection of the environment General notes .................................. 27 Pulling away Automatic transmission ................. 149 General notes ................................ 149 Hill start assist ............................... 150 Q QR code Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1 Rescue card ..................................... 32 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 31 Quick access for audio and telephone Changing the station/music track .............................................. 301 R RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................................................... RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... Radiator cover ................................... Radio Selecting a station ......................... Radio mode see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 195 253 331 243 298 Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle Declaration of conformity ................ 31 Rain closing feature (panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .. 101 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) Warning lamp ................................. 288 Reading lamp ..................................... 121 Rear compartment Setting the air vents ...................... 144 Setting the airflow ......................... 135 Setting the temperature ................ 134 Rear fog lamp Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Rear lamps see Lights Rear seat (folding the backrest forwards/back) ...................................... 311 Rear seats Display message ............................ 284 Folding the backrest forwards/ back ............................................... 311 Rear view camera Cleaning instructions ..................... 339 Display in the multimedia system .. 207 Function/notes ............................. 206 Switching on/off ........................... 207 Rear window blind ............................ 318 Rear window defroster Problem (malfunction) ................... 137 Switching on/off ........................... 136 Rear-view mirror Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 113 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 114 Recuperative Brake System Driving safety systems ..................... 45 Important safety notes .................... 45 Reflective safety jacket .................... 342 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) Important safety notes .................. 393 Refueling Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Important safety notes .................. 164 Refueling process .......................... 165 17 18 Index Refueling process (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ........................... 165 see Fuel Remote control Garage door opener ....................... 326 Programming (garage door opener) .......................................... 327 Replacing bulbs Important safety notes .................. 122 Overview of bulb types .................. 123 Removing/replacing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 123 Reporting safety defects .................... 32 Rescue card ......................................... 32 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 271 Warning lamp ................................. 293 Residual heat (climate control) ........ 137 Restraint system Display message ............................ 263 Introduction ..................................... 46 Warning lamp ................................. 292 Warning lamp (function) ................... 46 Reversing feature Panorama sliding sunroof ................ 99 Roller sunblinds ............................. 101 Side windows ................................... 95 Sliding sunroof ................................. 99 Trunk lid ........................................... 90 Reversing lamps (display message) ................................................... 267 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 29 Roller sunblind Panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel .................................. 101 Rear side windows ......................... 317 Rear window .................................. 318 Roof carrier ........................................ 315 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning guidelines) ......................................... 341 Roof load (maximum) ........................ 394 Route guidance see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 S Safety Children in the vehicle ..................... 62 Hybrid drive system ......................... 44 see Occupant safety see Operating safety Safety notes Hybrid vehicles ................................ 44 Safety system see Driving safety systems SD memory card Ejecting .......................................... 307 Inserting ........................................ 307 Inserting/removing ........................ 307 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Selecting ........................................ 244 Search & Send see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Seat belts Adjusting the driver's and frontpassenger seat belt ......................... 51 Adjusting the height ......................... 50 center rear-compartment seat ......... 50 Cleaning ......................................... 341 Correct usage .................................. 49 Fastening ......................................... 50 Important safety guidelines ............. 48 Introduction ..................................... 48 Releasing ......................................... 50 Warning lamp ................................. 287 Warning lamp (function) ................... 51 Seats Adjusting (electrically) ................... 106 Adjusting (Performance Seat) ........ 108 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support ................................................ 108 Adjusting the head restraint .......... 106 Calling up a stored setting (memory function) .................................. 117 Cleaning the cover ......................... 341 Correct driver's seat position ........ 104 Important safety notes .................. 104 Seat heating .................................. 108 Seat heating problem .................... 110 Index Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 116 Switching seat heating on/off ....... 108 Switching seat ventilation on/ off .................................................. 109 Securing a load see Securing cargo Securing cargo .................................. 313 Selector lever Cleaning ......................................... 340 see Automatic transmission Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 339 Service menu (on-board computer) .................................................. 246 Service message see ASSYST PLUS Service products Brake fluid ..................................... 392 Coolant (engine) ............................ 392 Engine oil ....................................... 391 Fuel ................................................ 388 Important safety notes .................. 388 Refrigerant (air-conditioning system) ............................................... 393 Washer fluid ................................... 393 Setting the charge current (onboard computer) ............................... 248 Setting the date/time format see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Setting the departure time (onboard computer) ............................... 249 Setting the language see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Setting the time see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Settings Factory (on-board computer) ......... 252 On-board computer ....................... 247 SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 253 Side impact air bag ............................. 53 Side marker lamp (display message) ................................................... 267 Side windows Cleaning ......................................... 338 Convenience closing feature ............ 96 Convenience opening feature .......... 96 Important safety information ........... 94 Opening/closing .............................. 95 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 98 Resetting ......................................... 97 Reversing feature ............................. 95 SIRIUS services see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Ski and snowboard bag .................... 310 Sliding sunroof Opening/closing .............................. 99 Resetting ....................................... 100 see Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel SmartKey Changing the battery ....................... 84 Changing the programming ............. 83 Checking the battery ....................... 84 Convenience closing feature ............ 96 Convenience opening feature .......... 96 Display message ............................ 285 Door central locking/unlocking ....... 81 Important safety notes .................... 81 KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 83 Loss ................................................. 86 Mechanical key ................................ 83 Overview .......................................... 81 Positions (ignition lock) ................. 146 Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86 Starting the engine ........................ 148 Smartphone Starting the engine ........................ 149 SMS see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Snow chains ...................................... 363 Socket (12 V) Center console .............................. 319 General notes ................................ 319 Rear compartment ......................... 319 Sound Switching on/off ........................... 299 Special seat belt retractor .................. 62 Specialist workshop ............................ 31 Speed, controlling see Cruise control 19 20 Index Speedometer Activating/deactivating the additional speedometer ........................ 251 Digital ............................................ 241 In the Instrument cluster ................. 36 Segments ...................................... 235 Selecting the display unit ............... 251 SPORT handling mode Deactivating/activating (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 74 Warning lamp ................................. 292 Sports exhaust system see AMG sports exhaust system Standing lamps Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Start/Stop button Starting the engine ........................ 148 Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ................................ 148 STEER CONTROL .................................. 78 Steering Display message ............................ 285 Warning lamps ............................... 297 Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (DISTRONIC PLUS) Display message ............................ 279 Steering assistant STEER CONTROL see STEER CONTROL Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically) ................... 111 Adjusting (manually) ...................... 110 Button overview ............................... 38 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 236 Cleaning ......................................... 340 EASY ENTRY/EXIT feature ............. 112 Important safety notes .................. 110 Steering wheel heating .................. 111 Storing settings (memory function) ............................................... 116 Steering wheel heating Problem (malfunction) ................... 112 Switching on/off ........................... 111 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 161 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 253 Stowage areas ................................... Stowage compartments Armrest (under) ............................. Center console .............................. Cup holders ................................... Door ............................................... Eyeglasses compartment ............... Glove box ....................................... Important safety information ......... Map pockets .................................. Rear ............................................... Stowage net ................................... see Stowage areas Stowage net ....................................... Stowage well beneath the trunk floor .................................................... Summer tires In winter ........................................ Sun visor ............................................ Suspension setting AIRMATIC ...................................... AMG adaptive sport suspension system ........................................... Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ................................................. Switching on media mode Via the device list .......................... 308 309 309 316 310 309 309 308 310 310 310 310 315 362 317 197 197 137 307 T Tachometer ........................................ 236 Tail lamps Display message ............................ 267 see Lights Tank content Fuel gauge ....................................... 36 Technical data Capacities ...................................... 388 Information .................................... 386 Tires/wheels ................................. 384 Vehicle data ................................... 394 Telephone Accepting a call (multifunction steering wheel) .............................. 245 Authorizing a mobile phone (connecting) ......................................... 306 Connecting a mobile phone (general information) ............................ 305 Index Display message ............................ Introduction ................................... Menu (on-board computer) ............ Number from the phone book ........ Redialing ........................................ Rejecting/ending a call ................. see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. Switching between mobile phones ........................................... Temperature Coolant (display in the instrument cluster) .......................................... Coolant (on-board computer) ......... Engine oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... Outside temperature ...................... Setting (climate control) ................ Transmission oil (on-board computer, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... Through-loading feature ................... Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... Tire pressure Calling up (on-board computer) ..... Checking manually ........................ Display message ............................ Maximum ....................................... Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... Notes ............................................. Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... Recommended ............................... Tire pressure loss warning system General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure electronically ........................................ Function/notes ............................. General notes ................................ Important safety notes .................. Restarting ...................................... Warning lamp ................................. Warning message .......................... TIREFIT kit .......................................... Storage location ............................ Tire pressure not reached .............. Tire pressure reached .................... 285 245 245 245 246 245 298 306 236 246 252 236 134 252 311 253 367 366 280 366 346 365 346 363 366 366 367 369 367 367 368 369 296 369 344 343 346 346 Tires Aspect ratio (definition) ................. Average weight of the vehicle occupants (definition) .................... Bar (definition) ............................... Changing a wheel .......................... Characteristics .............................. Checking ........................................ Curb weight (definition) ................. Definition of terms ......................... Direction of rotation ...................... Display message ............................ Distribution of the vehicle occupants (definition) ............................ DOT (Department of Transportation) (definition) ............................. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ............................................... GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) (definition) ..................................... GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (definition) ........................................... GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) (definition) .............................. Important safety notes .................. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment (definition) ...... Information on driving .................... Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... Labeling (overview) ........................ Load bearing index (definition) ...... Load index ..................................... Load index (definition) ................... Maximum load on a tire (definition) ............................................... Maximum loaded vehicle weight (definition) ..................................... Maximum permissible tire pressure (definition) ............................. Maximum tire load ......................... Maximum tire load (definition) ....... MOExtended tires .......................... Optional equipment weight (definition) ............................................ PSI (pounds per square inch) (definition) ........................................... Replacing ....................................... Service life ..................................... 379 377 377 379 377 361 378 377 380 280 379 377 377 378 378 378 360 378 360 378 374 379 376 378 378 378 378 376 378 362 379 379 379 361 21 22 Index Sidewall (definition) ....................... 379 Snow chains .................................. 363 Speed rating (definition) ................ 378 Storing ........................................... 380 Structure and characteristics (definition) ..................................... 377 Summer tires in winter .................. 362 Temperature .................................. 374 TIN (Tire Identification Number) (definition) ..................................... 379 Tire bead (definition) ...................... 379 Tire pressure (definition) ................ 379 Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 378 Tire size (data) ............................... 384 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating .................... 374 Tire tread ....................................... 361 Tire tread (definition) ..................... 379 Total load limit (definition) ............. 379 Traction ......................................... 373 Traction (definition) ....................... 379 Tread wear ..................................... 373 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...................................... 373 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards (definition) .................... 378 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 379 Wheel and tire combination ........... 384 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 378 see Flat tire Top Tether ............................................ 64 Touchpad Changing the station/music track .............................................. 301 Character suggestions ................... 300 Deleting characters ....................... 300 Entering a space ............................ 300 Entering characters ....................... 300 Gesture control .............................. 300 Handwriting recognition ................ 300 Operating the touchpad ................. 300 Overview ........................................ 300 Quick access for Audio .................. 301 Switching ....................................... 300 Switching input line ....................... 300 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting ............ 357 Important safety notes .................. 354 Towing a trailer ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ............................................... 76 Towing away Important safety guidelines ........... 354 Installing the towing eye ................ 355 Notes for 4MATIC vehicles ............ 356 Removing the towing eye ............... 355 Transporting the vehicle ................ 356 With both axles on the ground ....... 356 With the rear axle raised ................ 355 Towing eye ......................................... 343 Traffic reports see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 Traffic Sign Assist Display message ............................ 277 Function/notes ............................. 215 Important safety notes .................. 215 Instrument cluster display ............. 216 Transfer case ..................................... 164 Transmission see Automatic transmission Transmission position display ......... 157 Transmission position display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 157 Transporting the vehicle .................. 356 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .................................................. 340 Trip computer (on-board computer) .................................................. 240 Trip odometer Calling up ....................................... 239 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 241 Trunk Important safety notes .................... 89 Locking separately ........................... 94 Opening/closing (automatically from inside) ...................................... 93 Opening/closing (automatically from outside) ................................... 91 Opening/closing (from outside, HANDS-FREE ACCESS) .................... 92 Opening/closing (manually from outside) ............................................ 90 Trunk lid Display message ............................ 283 Index Obstacle recognition ........................ 90 Opening dimensions ...................... 394 Opening/closing .............................. 89 Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 394 Turn signals Changing bulbs (front) ................... 124 Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 124 Display message ............................ 267 Switching on/off ........................... 119 Two-way radio Frequencies ................................... 386 Installation ..................................... 386 Transmission output (maximum) .... 386 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate U Unlocking Emergency unlocking ....................... 89 From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................. 88 USB devices Connecting to the Media Interface ............................................... 307 V Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 317 Vehicle Correct use ...................................... 32 Data acquisition ............................... 32 Display message ............................ 282 Equipment ....................................... 28 Individual settings .......................... 247 Limited Warranty ............................. 32 Loading .......................................... 370 Locking (in an emergency) ............... 89 Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 81 Lowering ........................................ 384 Maintenance .................................... 29 Operating safety .............................. 30 Parking .......................................... 177 Parking for a long period ................ 179 Pulling away ................................... 149 Raising ........................................... 381 Reporting problems ......................... 32 Securing from rolling away ............ 380 Towing away .................................. 354 Transporting .................................. 356 Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 89 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 81 Vehicle data ................................... 394 Vehicle data Roof load (maximum) ..................... 394 Trunk load (maximum) ................... 394 Vehicle dimensions ........................... 394 Vehicle emergency locking ................ 89 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 387 Vehicle level AIRMATIC ...................................... 197 Display message ............................ 275 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 343 Video Operating the DVD ......................... 244 see also Digital Operator's Manual .................................................. 298 VIN Seat ............................................... 388 Type plate ...................................... 387 Voice Control System see Separate operating instructions W Warning Stickers ........................................... 44 Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................ 289 Brakes ........................................... 288 Check Engine ................................. 293 Coolant .......................................... 293 Distance warning ........................... 295 ESP® .............................................. 290 ESP® OFF ....................................... 291 Fuel tank ........................................ 293 General notes ................................ 286 Hybrid drive system ....................... 288 Overview .......................................... 36 Parking brake ................................ 292 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...................... 47 RBS (Recuperative Brake System) ............................................... 288 Reserve fuel ................................... 293 Restraint system ............................ 292 23 24 Index Seat belt ........................................ 287 SPORT handling mode ................... 292 Steering ......................................... 297 Tire pressure monitor .................... 296 Warranty .............................................. 28 Washer fluid Display message ............................ 285 Wheel and tire combinations Tires ............................................... 384 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 384 Wheel chock ...................................... 380 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 379 Checking ........................................ 361 Cleaning ......................................... 338 Important safety notes .................. 360 Information on driving .................... 360 Interchanging/changing ................ 379 Mounting a new wheel ................... 383 Mounting a wheel .......................... 380 Removing a wheel .......................... 383 Snow chains .................................. 363 Storing ........................................... 380 Tightening torque ........................... 384 Wheel size/tire size ....................... 384 Window curtain air bag Display message ............................ 264 Operation ......................................... 54 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...................................... 135 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ....................... 333 Important safety notes .................. 393 Windshield wipers Problem (malfunction) ................... 128 Replacing the wiper blades ............ 126 Switching on/off ........................... 125 Winter driving Important safety notes .................. 362 Slippery road surfaces ................... 184 Snow chains .................................. 363 Winter operation Radiator cover ............................... 331 Summer tires ................................. 362 Winter tires M+S tires ....................................... Wiper blades Cleaning ......................................... Important safety notes .................. Replacing ....................................... Replacing (windshield) ................... Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) .................................................. Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop 362 338 126 126 126 340 Digital Operator's Manual Introduction The printed Operator's Manual provides information about the safe operation of your vehicle. The Digital Operator's Manual additionally describes further functions and equipment installed in your vehicle. The functions of the vehicle and multimedia system are described in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia system. i You will not incur any costs when calling up the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital Operator's Manual works without connecting to the Internet. There are three ways to access the topics of the Digital Operator's Manual: RVisual search The visual search allows you to explore your vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can access many of the different topics covered by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehicle interior" view. RKeyword search The keyword search allows you to search for a keyword by entering characters. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND" section under the "Character entry (telephony)" keyword. RContents You can select individual sections in the contents. Operation Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Press the Ø button in the center console. The overview relating to the vehicle appears. X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller. X Confirm 7 the message about the warning and safety notes. The basic menu for the Digital Operator's Manual appears. X Operating the Digital Operator's Manual General notes Please observe the information about the operation of the controller (Y page 299). Content pages The content pages can be accessed by means of a visual search, a keyword search or using the contents. i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactivated for safety reasons while driving. To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3 the controller. X To display in full-screen or animation: slide 8 the controller to the left :. X To select information texts or save bookmarks: slide 9 the controller to the right ;. X To select a link: slide 6 the controller downwards =. X To exit a content page: select the % symbol ?. X 25 Digital Operator's Manual 26 To call up the basic menu of the Digital Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A. X To switch functions to the multimedia system using the buttons on the center console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø button. The selected menu appears. The Digital Operator's Manual remains open in the background. X Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner that takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions: Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- sumption. make sure that the tire pressures are correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rremove roof racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: Ralways Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Ravoid Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. off the engine in stationary traffic. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consumption. Rswitch H Environmental note Have a defective high-voltage battery disposed of in an environmentally-responsible manner. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. Environmental concerns and recommendations Wherever the operating instructions require you to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmental rules and regulations when disposing of materials. In this way you will help to protect the environment. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new parts. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- ces, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rcockpit Rinstrument cluster Rcenter console Z Introduction Protection of the environment 27 Introduction 28 Service and vehicle operation Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint systems. Have aftermarket accessories installed at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically approved for your vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality control. Every part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. More than 300,000 different genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers provide quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 387). Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Service and vehicle operation Warranty The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in accordance with the warranty terms and conditions in the Service and Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission System Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i Should you lose your Service and Warranty Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment i This Operator's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of going to print. Country-specific differences are possible. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. The new Service and Warranty Information booklet will be posted to you. Information for customers in California Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing of the need for its repair. (2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its repair. (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days. Please send your written notice to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Maintenance The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be done at regular intervals. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service advisor will record every service for you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Breakdown assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program offers technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) For additional information, refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in your vehicle literature portfolio. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of Address Change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service Center (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contacting you in a timely manner should the need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Vehicle operation outside the USA and Canada If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic converter may not be available. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the following addresses. In the USA Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department Z 29 Introduction Service and vehicle operation Introduction 30 Operating safety One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this can result in malfunctions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any required repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and elec- tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb or a hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody paneling. If these materials come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on continuing your journey you notice that driving safety is impaired, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Hybrid vehicles have a combustion engine and an electric motor. The voltage supply for operating the vehicle electrically is provided by the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. The components of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system are orange in color. Vehicles with an electric motor generate much less driving noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. This can happen, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave erratically. Declarations of conformity Vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the two following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to the diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and equipment on the diagnostics connection is used, the starter battery may discharge. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitoring information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the necessary specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the case for work relevant to safety. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Ralterations, installation work and modifications Rwork on electronic components Rwork on the hybrid drive system Z 31 Introduction Operating safety 32 Data stored in the vehicle Introduction Correct use If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: Rthe safety notes in this manual Rthe vehicle technical data Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the problem diagnosed and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Customer Relations Department Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov Limited Warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR codes for the rescue card The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric cables. You can find more information under http:// portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/ content/asportal/en/communication/ informationen_fuer/QRCode.html. Data stored in the vehicle Data storage A wide range of electronic components in your vehicle contain data memories. These data memories temporarily or permanently store technical information about: RVehicle's operating state RIncidents RMalfunctions In general, this technical information documents the state of a component, a module, a system or the surroundings. These include, for example: Roperating conditions of system components, e.g. fluid levels Rthe vehicle's status messages and those of its individual components, e.g. number of wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal position Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components, e.g. lights, brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating conditions in special driving situations, e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of stability control systems Rambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature This data is of an exclusively technical nature and can be used to: Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunctions and defects Ranalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident Roptimize vehicle function The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. When your vehicle is serviced, technical information can be read from the event data memory and malfunction data memory. Services include, for example: Rrepair services Rservice processes Rwarranties Rquality assurance The vehicle is read out by employees of the service network (including the manufacturer) using special diagnostic testers. More detailed information is obtained from it, if required. After a malfunction has been rectified, the information is deleted from the malfunction memory or is continually overwritten. When operating the vehicle, situations are conceivable in which this technical data, in connec- tion with other information (if necessary, under consultation with an authorized expert), could be traced to a person. Examples include: Raccident reports Rdamage to the vehicle Rwitness statements Further additional functions that have been contractually agreed upon with the customer allow certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehicle as well. The additional functions include, for example, vehicle location in case of an emergency. COMAND/mbrace If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the location of the vehicle may be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace system. For additional information please refer to the COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: RHow various systems in your vehicle were operating RWhether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened RHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and RHow fast the vehicle was traveling. Z 33 Introduction Data stored in the vehicle Introduction 34 Information on copyright These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, accident claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others without the consent of the vehicle owners or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint System Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Cockpit 35 At a glance Cockpit Function Page : Steering wheel paddle shifters 161 ; Combination switch 119 = Horn ? Instrument cluster A DIRECT SELECT lever 156 B Climate control systems 129 C Overhead control panel 42 D Control panel for multimedia system and vehicle functions 39 E Ignition lock Start/Stop button 146 146 F Adjusts the steering wheel 110 G Cruise control lever 185 36 Function Page H Electric parking brake I Diagnostics connection J Opens the hood 330 K Light switch 118 L Control panel for: Activating Steering Assist Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist Deactivating PARKTRONIC Switching on the 360° camera Switching on the head-up display Vehicles without a driver assistance system: map/ coin holder 178 31 192 222 199 210 238 36 Instrument cluster At a glance Instrument cluster Function Page : Speedometer Speedometer segments 235 ; å ESP® OFF 290 = ÷ ESP® 290 ? · Distance warning 295 A Ð Power steering 297 B #! Turn signals 119 C Multifunction display 237 D ! Electric parking brake (yellow) E Function Page K ? Coolant 293 L Coolant temperature display 236 M é RBS (Recuperative Brake System) 288 N J This lamp has no function O 6 Restraint system P ü Seat belt 287 Q K High-beam headlamps 119 292 R L Low-beam headlamps 119 ! ABS 289 S F ; Check Engine 293 8 Reserve fuel level with fuel filler flap location indicator (right) 293 G Tachometer 236 T Fuel level indicator H Electric parking brake (red) F USA only ! Canada only 292 U T Parking lamps, license plate lamps and instrument cluster lighting 119 I Brakes (red) $ USA only J Canada only 288 V R Rear fog lamp 119 W h Tire pressure monitor 296 J M SPORT handling mode in Mercedes-AMG vehicles 292 46 Instrument cluster 37 i You can find further information on the At a glance instrument cluster in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles in the Digital Operator's Manual under "PLUG-IN HYBRID operation". 38 Multifunction steering wheel At a glance Multifunction steering wheel Function : Multifunction display ; Multimedia system display = ~ Rejects or ends a call 6 Makes or accepts a call Further telephone functions W X Adjusts volume 8 Mute ó Switches on voiceoperated control navigation or the Voice Control System Page 237 245 i In vehicles with multimedia system COMAND you can find further information: the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the DVD changer or single DVD drive in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the Voice Control System in the separate operating instructions Ron i In vehicles with multimedia system Audio 20 you can find further information: Ron the multimedia system in the Digital Operator's Manual Ron the voice-operated control of the navigation in the manufacturer's operating instructions Function ? ò Opens the menu list 9 : Selects a menu a Confirms the selection % Back Operating the on-board computer ñ Switches off voiceoperated control navigation or the Voice Control System Page 236 Center console 39 Center console At a glance Center console, upper section Function Page : Climate control systems 129 ; £ Hazard warning lamps 120 = Ø Vehicle functions/ system settings button (see the separate operating instructions) ? % Telephone button (see the separate operating instructions) A PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp ATA indicator lamp B Analog clock (not available on all equipment levels) 47 79 Function C Õ Media button (see the separate operating instructions) D $ Radio button (see the separate operating instructions) E Ø Navigation button (see the separate operating instructions) F þ Inserts or ejects a CD or DVD (see the separate operating instructions) Page 40 Center console At a glance Center console, lower section Function : Stowage compartment Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Cup holder ; Adjusts the volume/mute (see the separate operating instructions) = Switches multimedia system on or off (see separate operating instructions) ? u Rear window roller sunblind A Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions) B Stowage compartment Page 308 318 319 319 316 318 308 Function C Page è ECO start/stop function (vehicles without PLUGIN HYBRID operation) Selects the operating mode (PLUG-IN HYBRID operation) 150 D É Sets the vehicle level 196 E DYNAMIC SELECT switch 154 F Back button (see the separate operating instructions) G Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions) H g Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions) 226 Center console 41 At a glance Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Function : ; Page Ashtray Cigarette lighter Socket Cup holder 318 319 319 316 Adjusts or mutes the volume (see the separate operating instructions) = Adjusts the volume of the AMG sports exhaust system 152 ? è ECO start/stop function 150 A Touchpad (see the separate operating instructions) B Stowage compartment C Activates/deactivates Activates/deactivates SPORT handling mode ESP® 308 74 74 Function D Page AMG adaptive sport suspension system (suspension setting) 197 E Manual gearshifting (permanent setting) 161 F DYNAMIC SELECT switch (selects the drive program) 154 G Back button (see the separate operating instructions) H Multimedia system controller (see the separate operating instructions) I g Switches to the favorites button (see the separate operating instructions) 42 Overhead control panel At a glance Overhead control panel Function Page : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 121 ; | Switches the automatic interior lighting control on/off 122 = G SOS button (mbrace system) ? Function E Page 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel Opens/closes the roller sunblinds 100 F Rear-view mirror 113 320 G c Switches the front interior lighting on/off Buttons for the garage door opener 327 122 H A u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 122 B p Switches the righthand reading lamp on/off 121 Microphone for mbrace (emergency call system), telephone and the Voice Control System; see the separate operating instructions C ï MB Info call button (mbrace system) I 322 F Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace system) D Eyeglasses compartment 309 101 321 Door control panel 43 At a glance Door control panel Function : Page Function E r45= Stores settings for the seat, exterior mirrors and steering column 116 ; Adjusts the seats electrically 106 = c Seat heating 108 ? s Seat ventilation 109 A Opens the door 88 B % & Unlocks/locks the vehicle 88 C W Opens/closes the rear left side window 94 D W Opens/closes the left side window 94 Page 7Zª\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 113 F W Opens/closes the right side window 94 G W Opens/closes the rear right side window 94 H n Override feature for the controls in the rear compartment 67 p Opens/closes the trunk lid 93 I 44 Hybrid vehicles Hybrid vehicles General notes Safety Hybrid technology combines a fuel efficient internal combustion engine with a powerful electric motor. Important safety notes Danger of electric shock G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. When towing a vehicle after an accident, be sure to observe the following sections: RTransporting the vehicle (Y page 356) RTowing the vehicle with the rear axle raised (Y page 355) RTowing a vehicle with both axles on the ground (Y page 356) Read the safety instructions on towing and towstarting (Y page 354). All components of the hybrid drive system are marked with yellow warning stickers that warn you of the danger of high voltage. The cables of the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system are orange in color. The ignition must be switched off when carrying out general tasks, such as changing bulbs or checking the coolant level. Automatic switching off of the hybrid drive system If components of the restraint system are activated during an accident, the hybrid drive system is automatically deactivated. The hybrid drive system is not activated when the vehicle is started if: Ran electrical short circuit is detected in the hybrid drive system Ran electrical connection in the hybrid drive system is disconnected This ensures that you do not come into contact with high voltage. Manual switching off of the hybrid drive system The hybrid drive system can be deactivated manually using the high voltage switch-off device. ! To prevent damage to the hybrid drive sys- tem please observe the following instructions: Ronly deactivate the hybrid drive system manually in the following situations. Rwork on the hybrid drive system may only be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, even when it has been deactivated manually. Deactivate the hybrid system manually if: Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up after an accident Rthe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint system components were not activated Rthe vehicle is badly damaged and has to be towed or transported Hybrid vehicles Press release clip : in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. X Pull the high voltage switch-off device ; apart until it engages in the stop position. If the hybrid drive system has been deactivated due to reasons mentioned above, have it checked at a qualified specialist workshop before reactivation. X High-voltage battery G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a critical value. In this case flammable gas escapes through a ventilation valve on the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: charging the highvoltage battery (Y page 168). Engine compartment Before opening the hood: X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch the ignition off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock. X Observe the warning notes on the risk of electric shock (Y page 44). X Observe the warning notices about the hood (Y page 330). RBS driving safety system (Recuperative Brake System) The Recuperative Brake System supports you when braking with an electronically-controlled brake boost mode and enables the recovery of kinetic energy (recuperation). Further information about the Recuperative Brake System (Y page 225). Z Safety If possible, move the vehicle out of the danger zone: shift the transmission into position N. X Release the electric parking brake. X Roll the vehicle to a safe place and park it safely. Get assistance from others if necessary. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. There is therefore a risk of being locked out if the vehicle is being pushed or tested on a dynamometer. X Switch the ignition off. X Shift the transmission to position P. Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 178). Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 380). X To use the high-voltage switch-off device: open the hood. X 45 Occupant safety 46 Safety Panic alarm To activate: press ! button : for at least one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed. X To deactivate: press ! button : again. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Press the Start/Stop button. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle. X Occupant safety Introduction to the restraint system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. Furthermore, the restraint system may also reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occupants when an accident occurs. The restraint system includes: RSeat belt system RAir bags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing system The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only offer the intended level of protection if all vehicle occupants: Rare correctly wearing their seat belts. (Y page 49) Radjust their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 104). The driver is also responsible for ensuring that the steering wheel has been correctly positioned. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 104). Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 51). An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag increases the level of protection for vehicle occupants in the event of an accident. For example, if the protection already provided by a correctly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags are not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bags that would increase the degree of protection afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of an accident are deployed. Seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 58). See “Children in the vehicle” for information on children traveling with you as well as vehicle restraint systems (Y page 62). Important safety notes G WARNING Modifications to the restraint system may cause it to no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and at Occupant safety G WARNING If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or air bag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Hybrid vehicles: G DANGER If the restraint system is malfunctioning, individual restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. This could affect Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags, for example. The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may also not be deactivated as intended in the event of an accident. You could suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the vehicle's highvoltage electrical system. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Immediately switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock after an accident. PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp Safety regular intervals while the engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in good time. The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are in operational readiness. A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint system warning lamp: Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switched on Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with the engine running Rlights up again while the engine is running All vehicles, except hybrid vehicles: 47 PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classification System (OCS). The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front air bag must either be deactivated or enabled; see the following points. You must make sure of this both before and during a journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe the notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62). There you will also find instructions on rearward and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: depending on the classification of the person in the front-passenger Z 48 Occupant safety Safety seat, the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or deactivated (Y page 54). Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts“ (Y page 48) and "Air bags" (Y page 51). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Seat belts Introduction A correctly fastened seat belt is the most effective means of restraining the movement of vehicle occupants in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior or being thrown from the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle occupants in the best position in relation to the air bag. The seat belt system consists of: RSeat belts REmergency Tensioning Devices for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear compartment RSeat belt force limiters for the front seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear If the seat belt is pulled quickly or suddenly from the belt outlet, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out further. Emergency Tensioning Devices tighten the seat belts in an accident, pulling them close against the occupant's body. They do not, however, pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. Emergency Tensioning Devices do not correct an incorrect seat position or incorrectly worn seat belts. When triggered, the seat belt force limiter reduces the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant. The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are synchronized with the front air bags, which absorb part of the deceleration force. This makes it possible to reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants are subjected during an accident. ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise lead to the triggering of the Emergency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be replaced. Important safety notes The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. G WARNING If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or when abruptly changing direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants are seated properly with a correctly fastened seat belt. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot fasten the seat belt correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause additional injury, for example, in an accident, during braking or an Occupant safety If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Ralways observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 54) G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended protective function if: Rthey are damaged, modified, extremely dirty, bleach or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels have been modified Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia reels. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn out and clean. Following an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use seat belts that have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. AMG Performance seat: this seat is designed for the standard three-point seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint system cannot provide the best level of protection. G WARNING If you feed seat belts through the opening in the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be damaged or may even break in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Only use the standard three-point seat belt. Never modify the seat belt system. Proper use of the seat belts Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat belt (Y page 48). All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt correctly before setting off. Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly for the entire journey. When fastening the seat belt, make sure that: RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt buckle that belongs to the seat. RThe seat belt is tightened across your body. Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. RThe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces produced in the event of an accident be evenly distributed across the belt. RThe shoulder section of the belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt should not come into contact with your neck and must not be routed under the arm. Where possible, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height. RThe lap belt must be taut and as low as possible over your lap. The lap belt must always pass across your hip joints and never across your stomach or abdomen. Pregnant women must take particular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be pushed down across the hip joints and pulled tight using the shoulder section. RThe seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed or fragile objects. Z Safety abrupt change of direction. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint systems. 49 Safety 50 Occupant safety If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g. eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items in a more suitable location. ROnly one person should use each seat belt at any one time. On no account should babies or children travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt. RObjects are not secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’s occupants. Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g. cushions, between the occupant and the seat. Seat belts are solely intended for the protection and restraint of the vehicle occupants. To secure objects, luggage or loads, always observe the "Loading guidelines" (Y page 308). Fastening and adjusting the seat belts Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 49). If the center rear seat belt is being used, also observe the information about the seat belt for the center rear seat (Y page 50). Adjust the seat (Y page 104). The seat backrest must be in an almost vertical position. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet and engage belt tongue ; into belt buckle :. The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the front-passenger seat may be tightened automatically, see "Belt adjustment" (Y page 51). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. X The shoulder section of the seat belt must always be routed across the center of the shoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary. X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards. The belt outlet will engage in various positions. X To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide belt outlet downwards. X Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired position and make sure that the belt outlet engages. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found under "Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 62). Seat belt for the center rear seat If the left-hand rear seat backrest is folded down and back up again, the rear center seat belt may lock. The seat belt can then not be pulled out. X To release the rear center seat belt: pull the seat belt out approximately 1 in (25 mm) at the belt outlet on the backrest and then release it again. The seat belt is retracted and released. Releasing seat belts Basic illustration ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Occupant safety Press the release button in the belt buckle, hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt back. Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and Rthe ignition is switched on The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain retraction force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and off using the multimedia system. Information on activating and deactivating the seat-belt adjustment function can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual or in the separate operating instructions for the multimedia system. Belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If the front doors are closed and the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again after the six seconds. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone switches off after six seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fastened. If the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front-passenger seat belt is not fastened, a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver or front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the belt warning automatically reactivates. i For more information on the 7 seat belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts" (Y page 287). Air bags Introduction The air bag installation point is identified by the label AIR BAG. An air bag supplements a correctly fastened seat belt. However, it is not intended as a substitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide additional protection in the event of an accident. Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The various air bag systems work independently of each other (Y page 58). There is, however, no system available today that can completely rule out injury or death. It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury caused by an air bag due to the high speed at which the air bag must be deployed. Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not sit in the correct seat position, the air bag cannot protect as intended and could even cause additional injury when deployed. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, always make sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, including pregnant women Rare sitting correctly and maintain the greatest possible distance to the air bags Rfollow the following instructions Always make sure that there are no objects between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. Z Safety X 51 52 Occupant safety Safety RAdjust the seats properly before beginning your journey. Always make sure that the seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support the head at about eye level. RMove the driver's and front-passenger seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be driven safely. ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bags. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. RFor this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint systems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot be worn correctly. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under twelve years of age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable child restraint systems. RChild restraint systems should be installed on the rear seats. ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit, the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated (Y page 47). RAlways observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 54) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62) in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on the grab handles or coat hooks. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows, rear side trim or side walls. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. G WARNING If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects to it. G WARNING Sensors to control the air bags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door paneling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Front air bags Occupant safety Driver's knee bag Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is always deployed along with the driver's front air bag. The driver's knee bag offers additional thigh, knee and lower leg protection for the occupant in the driver's seat. Side impact air bags G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even prevent the deployment of the air bags integrated into the seats. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz. Safety Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steering wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove box. When deployed, the front air bags offer additional head and thorax protection for the occupants in the front seats. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps inform you about the status of the front-passenger air bag (Y page 47). The front-passenger front air bag will only deploy if: Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 54). The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit (Y page 54) Rthe restraint system control unit predicts a high accident severity 53 Front side impact air bags : and rear side impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bolster of the seat backrest. When deployed, the side impact air bag offers additional thorax protection. However, it does not protect the: Rhead Rneck Rarms In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the following conditions: Rthe OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate accident situation occurs. In this case, deployment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not. Z 54 Occupant safety Safety Window curtain air bags Window curtain air bags : are integrated into the side of the roof frame and deployed in the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. When deployed, the window curtain air bag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect the chest or arms. In the event of a side impact, the window curtain air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be deployed in other accident situations (Y page 58). If the front passenger does not observe these conditions, OCS may produce a false classification, e.g. because the front passenger: Rtransfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat cushion If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the correct positioning of the child restraint system. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the frontpassenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant Classification System operation (OCS) Occupant Classification System (OCS) Introduction The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. The system does not disable: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Rin an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possible : PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp ; PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp The indicator lamps inform you whether the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated or enabled. X Press the Start/Stop button once or twice, or turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The system carries out self-diagnostics. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front air bag. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all deployment criteria are met, the front-passenger front air bag is deployed. RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the status of the front-passenger front air bag changes while the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message appears in the instrument cluster (Y page 265). When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always pay attention to the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamps. Be aware of the status of the front-passenger front air bag both before and during the journey. G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the frontpassenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible. Rthe person is seated correctly. Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front-passenger front air bag is correct. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger front air bag may deploy in an accident. The child could be struck by the air bag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front air bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. You can find more information on OCS under "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 58). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON is lit up This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Z 55 Safety Occupant safety 56 Occupant safety If OCS determines that: front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a child of up to twelve months old, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. But even in the case of a twelve-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON can light up permanently after the system self-test. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is activated. The result of the classification is dependent on, among other factors, the child restraint system and the child's stature. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. RThe front-passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), either the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a person of smaller stature can sit on a rear seat. - If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature should not use the front-passenger seat. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person of adult stature, the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up after the system self-test and remains lit. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is activated. If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 62). When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated in this case and does not deploy during an accident. Safety Rthe Have the system checked by qualified technicians as soon as possible. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the seat cushion is damaged, have the necessary repair work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use seat accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag will also deploy. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the frontpassenger seat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag is either enabled or deactivated. System self-test G DANGER If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps do not light up during the system self-test, the system is malfunctioning. The frontpassenger front air bag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G DANGER If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident. In this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective function, e.g. when a person is seated in the frontpassenger seat. Occupant safety That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: 57 For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 58). Safety Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the frontpassenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the frontpassenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat. Have the Occupant Classification System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the frontpassenger seat. The backrest of the forwardfacing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54). Z 58 Occupant safety Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56). Safety Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incorBAG OFF indicator lamp rect. lights up and remains lit, X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person even though the fronton the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 54). passenger seat is occuX If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the frontpied by an adult or a perpassenger seat may not be used. son of a stature correX Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedessponding to that of an Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator lamp X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child does not light up and/or seat. does not stay on. X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on The front-passenger seat the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the is: forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary, Runoccupied adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied with the weight of a child up to X Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted. twelve months old in a X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat child restraint system belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Deployment of Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags Important safety notes G WARNING The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. G WARNING A deployed air bag no longer offers any protection and cannot provide the intended pro- Occupant safety It is important for your safety and that of any passengers to have deployed air bags replaced and to have any malfunctioning air bags repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags continue to perform their protective function for the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash. G WARNING Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices which have been triggered immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to trigger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous situations. This procedure is reversible. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a small amount of powder may also be released. The 6 restraint system warning lamp will light up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hearing. The powder released is generally not hazardous to health, it could however cause shortterm breathing difficulties in people with asthma or other respiratory problems. If it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle immediately or open a window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. Check with your local government’s disposal guidelines. California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Method of operation During the first stage of a collision, the restraint system control unit evaluates important physical data relating to vehicle deceleration or acceleration, such as: RDuration RDirection RIntensity Based on the evaluation of this data, the restraint system control unit triggers the Emergency Tensioning Devices in the event of a frontal or rear-end collision. An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be triggered if: Rthe ignition is switched on Rthe components of the restraint system are operational. You can find further information under "Restraint system warning lamp" (Y page 46) Rthe belt tongue is inserted into the buckle on the respective front seat The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear compartment are triggered independently of the lock status of the seat belts. If the restraint system control unit detects a high accident severity, additional components of the restraint system are deployed independently of one another in certain frontal collision situations: RFront air bags and driver's knee bag RWindow curtain air bag, if the system determines that it can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Depending on the person occupying the frontpassenger seat, the front-passenger air bag is activated or deactivated. The front-passenger front air bag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (Y page 47). Your vehicle has dual-stage front air bags. During the first deployment stage, the front air bag fills with propellant gas which reduces the risk of injury. The second stage is then triggered within milliseconds, filling the front air bag with the maximum amount of propellant gas. The deployment thresholds for the Emergency Tensioning Devices and air bags are calculated on the basis of the vehicle deceleration or acceleration occurring at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The Z Safety tection in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. 59 Safety 60 Occupant safety air bag must be deployed on time, at the start of the collision. The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration and the direction of the force are essentially determined by: Rdistribution of the force during the impact Rcollision angle Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle Rcharacteristics of the object with which the vehicle has collided Factors which can only be seen and measured after the collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an air bag, nor do they provide an indication of air bag deployment. The vehicle may be considerably deformed without an air bag being deployed. This is the case if only relatively easily deformable parts have been hit and a high rate of deceleration has not been reached. Conversely, an air bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. This is the case if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as the longitudinal body members are hit in an accident and the rate of deceleration is sufficient. If the restraint system control unit detects a side impact or that the vehicle is rolling over, the relevant restraint system components are deployed independently of one another depending on the anticipated type of accident. RSide impact air bags on the side of the collision, regardless of Emergency Tensioning Device and use of the seat belt on the driver's side and the outer seats on the second row The side impact air bag on the frontpassenger side deploys under the following conditions: - the OCS system detects that the frontpassenger seat is occupied or - the belt tongue has engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat. RWindow curtain air bag on the side of the collision, regardless of seat belt use and whether front-passenger seat is occupied RFront Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system determines that they can offer additional protection for the vehicle occupants in this situation RRear Emergency Tensioning Devices in certain situations if the vehicle rolls over RWindow curtain air bags on the driver's and front-passenger sides in certain rollover sit- uations if the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The various air bag systems work independently of each other. How the air bag system works is determined by the severity of the accident detected, especially the vehicle deceleration or acceleration, and the apparent type of accident: Rfrontal collision Rside impact Rrollover PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection system) Introduction PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. Important safety notes ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger that the seats and/or objects could be damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Despite your vehicle being equipped with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of personal injuries occurring as a result of an accident cannot be eliminated. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. Function PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when BAS is activated Rin critical driving situations, e.g. when physical limits are exceeded and the vehicle understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with the Driving Assistance package: when a driver assistance system intervenes powerfully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain situations Occupant safety PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection system PLUS) Function PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situations if the radar sensor system detects an imminent head-on or rear-end collision. PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rif the radar sensor system detects that a head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the radar sensor system detects that a rearend collision is imminent: - the brake pressure is increased if the driver applies the brakes when the vehicle is stationary. - the seat belts are pre-tensioned. The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application is canceled: Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed when a gear is engaged Rif the risk of a collision passes or is no longer detected Rif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to pull away If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, the original settings are restored. Introduction PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE® PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Important safety notes The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannot prevent an imminent collision. The driver is not warned about the intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS. PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if the vehicle is backing up. When driving, or when parking or exiting a parking space with assistance from Active Parking Assist, PRE-SAFE® PLUS will not apply the brakes. Automatic measures after an accident Immediately after an accident, the following measures are implemented, depending on the type and severity of the impact: Rthe hazard warning lamps are activated Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked Rthe front side windows are lowered Rvehicles with a memory function: the electrically adjustable steering wheel is raised Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supply is cut off Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency call Rvehicles with the hybrid drive system: the hybrid system and the high-voltage electrical system are deactivated Z Safety PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures depending on the hazardous situation detected: Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows and the sliding sunroof are closed. Rvehicles with the memory function for the front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorable position. If the hazardous situation passes without resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. You will find information on the convenience function under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 51). 61 62 Children in the vehicle Children in the vehicle Safety Important safety notes Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children are generally better protected there. If a child younger than twelve years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes in this section in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 54) G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- dren may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt (Y page 48) and the notes on correct use of seat belts (Y page 49). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be properly fastened without a booster seat. Special seat belt retractor G WARNING If the seat belt is released while driving, the child restraint system will no longer be secured properly. The special seat belt retractor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate the special seat belt retractor and secure the child restraint system properly. All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver's seat belt, are equipped with a special seat belt retractor. When activated, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken once the child seat is secured. Installing a child restraint system: Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet. X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. always resting completely on the seat cushion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under or behind the child restraint system. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. Activating the special seat belt retractor: G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always install child restraint systems properly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. While the seat belt is retracting, you should hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt retractor is enabled. X Push the child restraint system down so that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen. X Removing the child restraint system and deactivating the special seat belt retractor: X Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the release button of the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt tongue back towards the belt sash guide. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Child restraint system The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states Rthe U.S. territories Rthe District of Columbia Rall Canadian provinces You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. G WARNING If the child restraint system is installed incorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions and the notes on use. Please ensure, that the base of the child restraint system is You will find further information on stowing objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guidelines" (Y page 308). G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident can no longer protect as intended. The child cannot then be restrained in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident as soon as possible. Have the securing systems on the child restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop, before you install a child restraint system again. The securing systems of child restraint systems are: Rthe seat belt system LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings Rthe Top Tether anchorages If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the Rthe Z 63 Safety Children in the vehicle Safety 64 Children in the vehicle information on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 54). There you will also find information on deactivating the frontpassenger front air bag. All child restraint systems must meet the following standards: RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system corresponds to the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the installation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system G WARNING LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems do not offer sufficient protective effect for children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs (22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. In the event of an accident, a child might not be restrained correctly. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Before every trip, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ! When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat belt for the middle seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could otherwise be damaged. Vehicles with rear seat armrest: adjust the rear seat armrest so that LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings : for the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system are accessible. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings :. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear seats. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also be used and can be installed using the vehicle's seat belt system. Install the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Top Tether Introduction Top Tether provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt, this should always be used. Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. Rear seat backrests that are not locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g. Children in the vehicle If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. Top Tether anchorages Route Top Tether belt A under head restraint : between the two head restraint bars. X Hook Top Tether hook ? of Top Tether belt A into Top Tether anchorage =. Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Move head restraint : back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt A. X Child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat General notes Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in the rear compartment behind the outer head restraints on the parcel shelf. X Move head restraint : upwards. X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Accident statistics show that children secured in the rear seats are safer than children secured in the front-passenger seat. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install the child restraint system on a rear seat. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the instructions and safety notes on the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" (Y page 54). You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the frontpassenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the frontpassenger front air bag Rthe unsuitable positioning of the child restraint system, e.g. too close to the dashboard Rearward-facing child restraint system If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 47) is the frontpassenger front air bag deactivated. Z Safety in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always lock rear seat backrests after installing a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock verification indicator. 65 66 Children in the vehicle Safety Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. Override feature for: Rthe Rthe rear doors (Y page 67) rear side windows (Y page 67) Forward-facing child restraint system G WARNING If it is absolutely necessary to install a forwardfacing child restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accordingly. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating instructions. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thus endangering other people or road users Rexit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always activate the child-proof locks and override feature if children are traveling in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is subjected to direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Children may burn themselves on these parts, particularly on the metal parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with you, always ensure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Driving safety systems Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unattended or unsecured in the vehicle, they could press buttons or switches, for example. As a result, they could: Ractivate You secure each door individually with the childproof locks on the rear doors. A door secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened from the outside. X To activate: press the child-proof lock lever up in the direction of arrow :. X Make sure that the child-proof locks are working properly. X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock lever down in the direction of arrow ;. Override feature for the rear side windows X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment. vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby endangering other road users Unsecured animals could also be flung around the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering or braking, thereby injuring vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly during the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Driving safety systems Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (Y page 68) RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 68) RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist (Brake Assist System PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist) (Y page 69) RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 70) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 73) REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) (Y page 76) RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 76) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77) RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 78) Z Safety Child-proof locks for the rear doors 67 68 Driving safety systems Safety Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for maintaining the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The driving safety systems described only work as effectively as possible when there is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Pay particular attention to the information regarding tires, recommended minimum tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires" section (Y page 360). In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) General information ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is switched on. It goes out when the engine is running. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you only brake gently. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deac- tivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 289) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 256). Braking If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving. X BAS (Brake Assist System) General information BAS operates in emergency braking situations. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking force, thus shortening the stopping distance. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). G WARNING If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. There is a risk of an accident. In an emergency braking situation, depress the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Driving safety systems Braking Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X 69 Important safety notes G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, BAS PLUS may: BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are assisted when braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 68). BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be operational. With the help of a sensor system and a camera system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles: Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time Rthat cross the path of your vehicle In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. If the radar sensor system or the camera system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are restricted or no longer available. The brake system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section“ (Y page 69). unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot G WARNING BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify people, this is especially the case if they are moving. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING BAS PLUS does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rwhen cornering As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Z Safety Rintervene 70 Driving safety systems Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Safety Rvehicles quickly move into the radar sensor system detection range Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the brake force necessary if: Ryou approach an obstacle, and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision When driving at a speed under 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pressure will be carried out at the last possible moment. When driving at a speed above 20 mph (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in hazardous situations with vehicles in front within a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h). At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can react to: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle Robstacles crossing your path, which move in the detection range of the sensors and are recognized by them i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak- ing force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 60). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes function as usual again, if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou activate kickdown. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 68). COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists of a distance warning function with an autonomous braking function and adaptive Brake Assist. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not react to the visual and audible collision warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you. Driving safety systems Important safety notes Important safety notes In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line Rthe vehicle is new or after a service on the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system Observe the important safety notes in the "Breaking-in notes" section (Y page 145). Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Switching on/off The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is automatically active after switching on the ignition. You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer (Y page 247). When deactivated, the distance warning function and the autonomous braking function are also deactivated. If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the assistance graphics display. Distance warning function General information The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. 71 tion for driving safety systems (Y page 68). G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function cannot provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning function may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and do not rely solely on the distance warning function. Rnot Function Starting at a speed of approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the distance warning function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound, and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. or X Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the system to display a warning. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles Z Safety Rto Rto 72 Driving safety systems that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), the distance warning function can also react to stationary obstacles, such as stopped or parked vehicles. Safety Autonomous braking function If the driver does not react to the distance warning signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the autonomous braking function. The autonomous braking function: Rgives the driver more time to react to critical driving situations Rcan help the driver to avoid an accident or Rreduces the effects of an accident Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 65 mph (7 - 105 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: the autonomous braking function is available in the following speed ranges: R4 - 124 mph (7 - 200 km/h) for moving objects R4 - 31 mph (7 - 50 km/h) for stationary objects Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause the Autonomous Braking Function to intervene. If the autonomous braking function requires a particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 60). Adaptive Brake Assist General information i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 68). With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the distance warning signal can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of collision with the vehicle in front, it calculates the braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake Assist will automatically increase the braking force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions. Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assistance in hazardous situations at speeds above 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of reacting to moving objects that have already been detected as such at least once over the period of observation. Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to stationary obstacles. If Adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated simultaneously (Y page 60). X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will work normally again if: Ryou release the brake pedal. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. Rno obstacle is detected in front of your vehicle. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section for driving safety systems (Y page 68). G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations. In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can: Rintervene unnecessarily intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Rnot Driving safety systems Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Rto people or animals oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not intervene in all critical conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto Due to the nature of the system, particularly complicated but non-critical driving conditions may also cause Brake Assist to intervene. If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, the brake system remains available with full brake boosting effect and BAS. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) General notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e. power transmission between the tires and the road surface. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The engine output is also modified to keep the vehicle on the desired course within physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehicles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®. Traction control brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. In addition, more drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised, observe the notes on ESP® (Y page 355). If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 290) and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 256). Only use wheels with the recommended tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Characteristics of ESP® General information If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. If ESP® intervenes: Do not deactivate ESP® under any circumstances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. X Z Safety G WARNING 73 74 Driving safety systems Safety ECO start/stop function The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected status. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before the engine was switched off, ESP® remains deactivated when the engine is switched on again. Deactivating/activating ESP® (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 68). You can select between the following statuses of ESP: RESP® RESP® is activated. is deactivated. G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Deactivating/activating ESP® You can deactivate or activate ESP® via the onboard computer (Y page 247). ESP® deactivated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. ESP® activated: The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. REngine Deactivating/activating ESP® (Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 68). You can select between the following states of ESP®: RESP® is activated. handling mode is activated. RESP® is deactivated. RSPORT G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following. Driving safety systems If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. SPORT handling mode message appears in the multifunction display. X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. X To deactivate ESP®: press button : until the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The ÷ OFF message appears in the multifunction display. X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ON message appears in the multifunction display. ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an extended period with ESP® deactivated. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ESP®: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Ron specially designated roads when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired Driving in SPORT handling mode or without ESP® requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree. When SPORT handling mode is activated: i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations RESP® ESP® will described above no longer apply. otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Deactivating/activating ESP® Characteristics of activated SPORT handling mode only improves driving stability to a limited degree. RTraction control is still activated. REngine torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®: RESP® X To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly press button :. The M SPORT handling mode warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The no longer improves driving stability. torque is no longer limited and the drive wheels are able to spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. RTraction control is still activated. RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly with assistance from ESP®. REngine Z Safety G WARNING 75 76 Driving safety systems Safety RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it is also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP® intervenes. RESP® still provides support when you brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilization General information ESP® trailer stabilization is not available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to swerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until the vehicle/trailer combination has stabilized. Important safety notes G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer combination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. ESP® trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 65 km/h. ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. Crosswind Assist General information Strong crosswinds can cause your vehicle to deviate from a straight course. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated in ESP® noticeably reduces these impairments. ESP® intervenes automatically according to the direction and intensity of the crosswinds affecting your vehicle. ESP intervenes with stabilizing braking to assist you in keeping the vehicle in the lane. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. Important safety notes Crosswind Assist does not work if ESP® is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunction. EBD (electronic brake force distribution) General information EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 68). G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling characteristics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe information regarding indicator and warning lamps (Y page 289) as well as display messages (Y page 258). ADAPTIVE BRAKE ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 194) and hill start assist (Y page 150). Driving safety systems General information PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. i Pay attention to the important safety notes in the "Driving safety systems" section (Y page 68). PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package. For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driving, the radar sensor system and the camera system must be switched on and be operational. With the help of the radar sensor system and the camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehicle can be detected. PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians using typical characteristics such as the body contours and posture of a person standing upright. i Observe the restrictions described in the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 77). Important safety notes G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a danger of collision is detected. There may be a collision unless you brake yourself. Even after subsequent full application of the brakes a collision cannot always be avoided, particularly when approaching at too high a speed. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic conditions. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly identify people, especially if they are moving. In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot intervene. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. In order to maintain the appropriate distance to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. G WARNING PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: Rto small people, e.g. children animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Rto As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the recognition can be impaired. In the event of a partial application of the brakes, the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full braking pressure. Z Safety PRE-SAFE® Brake 77 Driving safety systems Safety 78 Recognition by the radar sensor system is also impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Ra narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Ra vehicle is traveling in front on a different line relative to the center of your vehicle Recognition by the camera system is also impaired in the event of: Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is covered Rglare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun being low in the sky Rdarkness Ror if: - pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path of the vehicle - the camera system no longer recognizes a pedestrian as a person due to special clothing or other objects - a pedestrian is concealed by other objects - the typical outline of a person is not distinguishable from the background Following damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. Following damage to the windshield, have the configuration and operation of the camera system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Function To activate/deactivate: activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 247). If the PRE-SAFE® Brake is not activated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display. Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. X X or X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. Take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicle automatically under the following conditions: Rthe driver and front-passenger have their seat belts fastened and Rthe vehicle speed is between approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h) At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect: Rstationary objects in the path of your vehicle, e.g. stopped or parked vehicles Rpedestrians in the path of your vehicle i If there is an increased risk of a collision, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are triggered (Y page 60). If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front remains and you do not brake, take evasive action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, up to the point of full brake application. Automatic emergency braking is not performed until immediately prior to an imminent accident. You can prevent the intervention of the PRESAFE® Brake at any time by: Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. Rreleasing the brake pedal. The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is ended automatically if: Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in front of your vehicle. STEER CONTROL General information STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. Protection against theft This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake. Rthe vehicle starts to skid. 79 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Important safety notes Safety i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- tion (Y page 68). No steering support is provided from STEER CONTROL, if: RESP® is deactivated is malfunctioning. Rthe lighting is faulty. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electrical power steering. RESP® Protection against theft Immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X To activate with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: switch the ignition off and open the driver's door. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. i The immobilizer is always deactivated when you start the engine. In the event that the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system is armed after approximately 10 seconds. X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe trunk lid Rthe hood X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. or X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. X or To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. X Z 80 Protection against theft Safety i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Customer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends a message or establishes a data connection provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace service. Rthe mbrace service has been activated properly. Rthe necessary mobile phone network is available. SmartKey Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag- netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicinity of powerful electrical installations. Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start function: do not keep the SmartKey on the parcel shelf or in the trunk. Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be detected, e.g. when starting the engine using the Start/Stop button. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing SmartKey functions : & To lock the vehicle ; F To open/close the trunk lid = % To unlock the vehicle X To unlock centrally: press the % button. If you do not open the vehicle within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: Rthe vehicle is locked again. protection is reactivated. Ranti-theft X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks the following components: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible signal can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Z 81 Opening and closing SmartKey SmartKey 82 You will receive visual and acoustic locking confirmation if all components were able to be locked. When the locator lighting is activated via the multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark after the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey (see the Digital Operator's Manual). To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: press and hold the F button until the trunk lid opens. X To open the trunk lid automatically from outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is located in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle, press the F button on the SmartKey. When the trunk lid closes you can then release the button. Opening and closing X KEYLESS-GO General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). A brief radio connection between the vehicle and the key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in, or in the direct vicinity of, the vehicle. This occurs, for example: Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile driving Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Rwhen the external door handles are touched Rduring convenience closing To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface of the door handle. X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface : or ;. Make sure that you do not touch the inner surface of the door handle. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an extended period. Further information on the convenience closing feature (Y page 96). X X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on the trunk lid. Deactivating and activating If you do not intend to use a key for an extended period of time, you can deactivate the KEYLESSGO function of the SmartKey. The SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby conserving battery power. For the purposes of activation/ deactivation, the vehicle must not be nearby. X To deactivate: press the & button on the SmartKey twice in rapid succession. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey flashes twice briefly and lights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated (Y page 84). X To activate: press any button on the SmartKey. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features are available again. SmartKey Mechanical key General notes General notes Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a SmartKey in the vehicle. If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Changing the settings of the locking system You can change the settings of the locking system. This means that only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel on your own. X To change the setting: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84). If the setting of the locking system is changed within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO functions can be changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles. X To restore the factory settings: press and hold the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 84). Removing the mechanical key X Push release catch : in the direction of the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. Further information: RUnlocking the driver's door (Y page 89) RLocking the vehicle (Y page 89) Inserting the mechanical key X Push mechanical key ; completely into the SmartKey until it engages and release catch : is back in its basic position. Z Opening and closing KEYLESS-GO start function 83 84 SmartKey SmartKey battery Checking the battery Opening and closing Important safety notes G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 84). If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing the & or % button: Rlocks or Runlocks the vehicle X i You can get a battery at any qualified specialist workshop. Replacing the battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey opening in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insert the new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other contaminants. X X 85 Opening and closing SmartKey Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey (Y page 83). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. X Z 86 SmartKey Problems with the SmartKey Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Opening and closing You can no longer lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle using X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary the SmartKey. (Y page 84). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You can no longer lock or KEYLESS-GO was deactivated. unlock the vehicle using X Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82). KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary (Y page 84). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 89) or lock (Y page 89) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Doors Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the Smart- X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior Key. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 350). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine cannot be started using the Start/ Stop button. The SmartKey is in the vehicle. The vehicle is locked. Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. X The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 84) and replace it if necessary (Y page 84). If this does not work: X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. X You have lost a SmartKey. You have lost the mechanical key. Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well. X X X X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Doors Important safety notes G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Rshifting Z Opening and closing Problem 87 Doors 88 Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Opening and closing You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 67). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). To unlock: press button :. To lock: press button ;. When the front-passenger door is closed, the vehicle is locked. Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The doors can be opened from the inside. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof locks (Y page 67). If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). When a locked door is opened from inside the vehicle, the previous unlocking process will be acknowledged if the vehicle: Rhas been locked with the locking button for the central locking or Rhas been locked automatically The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's door had been previously unlocked, only the door which has been opened from the inside is unlocked. X X X To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle ;. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up. The door is unlocked and opens. X To unlock a rear door: pull door handle ;. Locking knob : pops up and the door unlocks. X To open a rear door: pull door handle ; again. The door opens. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock and unlock the vehicle from the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door. Trunk 89 Insert the mechanical key into opening : in the protective cap. X Pull and hold the door handle. X Pull the protective cap on the mechanical key as straight as possible away from the vehicle until it releases. X Release the door handle. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for approximately five seconds until a tone sounds. If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: Rthe vehicle is being pushed. Rthe vehicle is being towed. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X i You can also activate and deactivate the automatic locking function via COMAND or Audio 20 (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Unlocking/locking driver's door with mechanical key i If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using the mechanical key, begin by pressing the locking button for the interior locking mechanism while the driver's door is open. Then lock the driver's door using the mechanical key. To unlock: turn the mechanical key counterclockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off the alarm (Y page 79). Trunk Important safety notes G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, Z Opening and closing Automatic locking feature 90 Trunk Opening and closing especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 394). You can limit the opening angle of the trunk lid in COMAND or Audio 20 (see the Digital Operator's Manual). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. You should preferably place luggage or loads in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308). G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing movement This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or Rpull or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door or Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid, or Rpull on the trunk lid handle Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Opening and closing manually Opening Obstruction recognition with trunk lid reversing feature Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature: The trunk lid is equipped with automatic obstruction detection with a reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically opening, this procedure is stopped. If a solid object blocks or restricts the trunk lid when automatically closing, the trunk lid opens again automatically. The automatic obstruction detection with reversing feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when opening and closing the trunk lid. X or X Press the F button on the SmartKey. Pull handle :. The trunk lid opens. Trunk trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. Pull the trunk lid down using recess : and push it closed. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82). X Opening/closing automatically from outside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: the F button on the SmartKey. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. Rpull the trunk lid handle ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 394). Opening automatically You can open the trunk lid automatically using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. or X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid handle and let it go again immediately. Closing automatically Rpress Rpull G WARNING : Closing button ; Locking button X Press closing button : in the trunk lid. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the Z Opening and closing Closing 91 Opening and closing 92 Trunk Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO: when the driver's door is closed you can simultaneously close the trunk lid and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. X Press locking button ; in the trunk lid. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid closes. The vehicle is locked. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk, the trunk lid opens again after it is closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey outside the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed. If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in the trunk before the closing procedure starts, the trunk lid remains open. Observe the following points: your KEYLESS-GO key about your person. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the rear detection range of the vehicle. RWhen making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground and that there is sufficient clearance to the rear of the vehicle. You could otherwise lose your balance e.g. on ice. RCarry HANDS-FREE ACCESS Important safety notes G WARNING The vehicle's exhaust system may be very hot. You could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system if you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS. There is a risk of injury. Always ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. General notes With KEYLESS-GO and HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you can open or close the trunk lid or stop the procedure without using your hands. This is useful if you have your hands full. To do this, make a kicking movement under the bumper with your foot. RAlways ensure that you only make the kicking movement within the detection range of sensors :. RStand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the rear area while doing so. RDo not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. Otherwise, the sensors may not function correctly. RHANDS-FREE ACCESS does not function when the engine is started. RDirt caused by road salt around sensors : may restrict functionality. Using the HANDS-FREE ACCESS with a prosthetic leg may restrict functionality. RIf a KEYLESS-GO key is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, HANDS-FREE ACCESS could be triggered. The trunk lid could thus be opened or closed unintentionally, for example, if you: - sit on the edge of the trunk. - set something down or lift something up behind the vehicle. - polish the rear of the vehicle. Do not carry the KEYLESS-GO key about your person in these situations or in situations similar to these. This will prevent the unintentional opening/closing of the trunk. Trunk Operation 93 Opening/closing automatically from inside X To open/close: kick into sensor detection range : under the bumper with your foot. A warning tone will sound while the trunk lid is opening or closing. If the trunk lid does not open/close after several attempts: wait at least ten seconds and then using your foot kick under the bumper again. If you hold your foot under the bumper for too long, the trunk lid does not open or close. Repeat the leg movement more quickly if this occurs. To stop the opening or closing procedure: Rkick with your leg in the sensor detection range : under the bumper or Rpress the closing button on the trunk lid, or Rpull the handle on the outside of the trunk lid or Rpress the F button on the SmartKey If the trunk lid closing procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will open If the trunk lid opening procedure has been stopped: Rmove your foot under the bumper again and the trunk lid will close X G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. or press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Rpress the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. Rpull the trunk lid handle Rpull Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be found in the "Vehicle data" section (Y page 394). Z Opening and closing Important safety notes Side windows 94 Opening and closing Deactivating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position ;. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk will also be unlocked. Opening and closing Trunk emergency release You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside with the emergency release button. To open: pull remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid opens. X To close: press and hold remote operating switch : for the trunk lid until the trunk lid is completely closed. When the vehicle is stationary, you can close the trunk lid from the driver's seat. When the vehicle is also unlocked, you can also open the trunk lid from inside. X Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk lid emergency release when the vehicle is stationary or while driving. The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed X Side windows Activating the function to lock the trunk separately: X Close the trunk lid. X Open the glove box. X Push the switch to position :. If the vehicle is unlocked centrally, the trunk remains locked. i You can also lock the glove box (Y page 309). Important safety notes G WARNING While opening the side windows, body parts could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If some- Side windows G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the side windows The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on each door for the corresponding side window. The switches on the driver's door take precedence. G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Side window reversing feature The side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from traveling upwards during the automatic closing process, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing a side window. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If : ; = ? Front left Front right Rear right Rear left Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To open manually: press and hold the corresponding switch. X To open fully: press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To close manually: pull the corresponding switch and hold it. X To close fully: pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. Automatic operation is started. X To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the corresponding switch again. If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again. You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. X Z Opening and closing body becomes trapped, release the switch or pull the switch to close the side window again. 95 Side windows 96 The side windows cannot be operated from the rear when the override feature for the side windows is activated (Y page 67). Information on opening and closing the roller sunblinds on the rear side windows (Y page 317). Convenience opening Opening and closing General notes If the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience opening function is available. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: you can ventilate the vehicle before you start driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry out the following functions simultaneously: Runlock the vehicle Ropen the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat The "convenience opening" feature is also available when the vehicle is unlocked. Convenience opening Press and hold the % button on the SmartKey until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the roller sunblinds are opened first. X Press and hold the % button once more until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel reaches the desired position. X To interrupt convenience opening: release the % button. X Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Observe the complete closing procedure when the convenience closing feature is operating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start function: if the SmartKey is in close proximity to the vehicle, the convenience closing function is available. When you lock the vehicle, you can simultaneously: Rclose the side windows Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller sunblinds. Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: Rthe side window (Y page 95) Rthe sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 99) Using the SmartKey Press and hold the & button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: press and hold the & button once more until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Side windows The driver's door and the door at which the handle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The gap between the SmartKey and the corresponding door handle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m). If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 95). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the respective side window remains closed after the button is released, then it has been set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. Opening and closing Using KEYLESS-GO 97 Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X Vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. X Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 95). X Hold the switch for an additional second. Z 98 Sliding sunroof Problems with the side windows G WARNING Opening and closing If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide. X X Remove the objects. Close the side window. A side window cannot be If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again closed and you cannot slightly: see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side windows are closed without the automatic reversing feature. Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. G WARNING While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, body parts in close proximity could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the opening and closing procedures. the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Sliding sunroof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may occur. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be damaged. ! The weather can change abruptly. It could start to rain or snow. Make sure that the sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. Resonance noises can occur in addition to the usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is open. They are caused by minor pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. Change the position of the sliding sunroof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Only for vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: G WARNING At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. This could trap you or other persons. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- gers Rover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Operating the sliding sunroof Opening and closing Sliding sunroof reversing feature Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof opens again automatically. The automatic reversing feature is only an aid and is no substitute for your attention when closing the sliding roof. : To raise ; To open = To close/lower Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop X Z Opening and closing ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of 99 Opening and closing 100 Sliding sunroof automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the sliding sunroof is in the closed position. The sun protection cover automatically opens along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or close the sun protection cover manually when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened. Operating the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing Resetting ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed fully after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear (Y page 99). X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully opened and closed again (Y page 99). X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above. : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 3 switch in the corresponding direction. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised at the rear, it automatically lowers slightly at higher speeds. The noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a result. At low speeds it raises again automatically. You can also temporarily deactivate automatic lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel raises again automatically. You can continue to operate the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel after you switch off the engine or remove the SmartKey. This function remains active for five minutes or until you open a front door. When a roof carrier is mounted the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a Sliding sunroof Rain-closing feature The raised panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel automatically lowers when driving if it starts to rain. The sliding sunroof is lowered depending on: Rthe road speed and Rthe intensity of the rain You can manually cancel the automatic closing procedure. Press or pull the 3 switch in any direction. To raise the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel again, press the 3 switch in direction :. The rain-closing feature is then deactivated until you: Rpress or pull the 3 switch in any direction or Rturn the SmartKey to another position in the ignition lock (Y page 146) opened and closed when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. Roller sunblind reversing feature The roller sunblinds are equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind opens again automatically. However, the automatic reversing feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of the responsibility of paying attention when closing the roller sunblinds. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react in particular to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rpress the switch in any direction during the Operating the roller sunblinds for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Opening and closing the roller sunblinds G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding sunroof during automatic opening or closing. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped. Rduring The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The roller sunblinds can only be : To open ; To open = To close You can only close the roller sunblinds when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. Z Opening and closing roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. 101 Sliding sunroof 102 Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press the 3 switch in direction :. Both roller sunblinds open, then the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is raised. X Pull the 3 switch in direction ;. The sunblinds open. X Pull the 3 switch in direction =. The roller sunblinds close when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. If you press or pull the 3 switch beyond the point of resistance, automatic operation is started in the corresponding direction. You can stop automatic operation by pressing or pulling again. Opening and closing X Resetting the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds cannot be fully opened or closed after resetting, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sunblinds if the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel or the front roller sunblind does not move smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow : until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. Pull the 3 switch several times in the direction of arrow : until the roller sunblinds are closed. X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional second. X Make sure that the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds can be fully opened and closed again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. X Sliding sunroof 103 Problems with the sliding sunroof Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both sliding sunroof variants. If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process The closing process is stopped. Rpress ! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more force. If the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed. The sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without the automatic reversing feature. Z Opening and closing G WARNING 104 Seats G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: should have a good overview of traffic conditions. Rthe seat belt is pulled snugly against the body and is routed across the center of your shoulder and across your hips in the pelvic area. Further related subjects: Radjust R Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Correct driver's seat position the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. Ryou RElectrical seat adjustment (Y page 106) RAdjusting the steering wheel mechanically (Y page 110) or electrically (Y page 111). RFastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 50). RAdjusting the rear-view mirrors (Y page 113). mirror and exterior RYou can store the seat, steering wheel, exterior mirror and head-up display settings with the memory function (Y page 116). Seats Important safety notes G WARNING Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Observe the following when adjusting steering wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =: Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag as possible. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. Ryour thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion. Ryour legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly. Rthe back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint. Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrument cluster clearly. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" (Y page 51) and "Children in the Vehicle" (Y page 62). G WARNING If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Seats G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. G WARNING poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats. Do not place sharp objects on the seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do not cover the seats with insulating materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The rear-compartment head restraints can be removed (Y page 107). Vehicles without the through-loading feature: the head restraints cannot be removed from the rear compartment seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. i Related topic: RRear bench seat (Y page 311) through-loading feature The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. 105 106 Seats Adjusting the seats electrically Adjusting the head restraints Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Radjust : ; = ? A B Electrically adjustable seats with memory function Head restraint height Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment i Further related subjects: RYou can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 116). RIf PRE-SAFE® is triggered, the frontpassenger seat will be moved to a better position if it was previously in an unfavorable position (Y page 60). Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted. : ; = ? A Electrically adjustable seats without memory function Backrest angle Seat height Seat cushion length Seat cushion angle Seat fore-and-aft adjustment the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING If the head restraints are not installed or not adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. General notes Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 104). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height and angle of the head restraints to the correct position. Seats Adjusting the head restraint height manually 107 Adjusting the height of the head restraints electrically To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment (Y page 106) up or down in the direction of the arrow. Vehicles with AMG Performance Seat: the height of the head restraints cannot be adjusted. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X To lower: press release catch : in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down to the desired position. X Adjusting the head restraint fore-andaft position manually Once the head restraint is fully lowered, press release catch :. X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the desired position. X X With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of the seat occupant's head. X To move forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages in the desired position. X To move backwards: press and hold release button :. X Push the head restraint back. X Release the release button once the head restraint is in the desired position. X Ensure that the head restraint has engaged properly. To lower: press release catch : and push the head restraint down until it is in the desired position. Installing and removing rear head restraints Release the rear seat backrest and fold it slightly forwards (Y page 311). X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint out of the guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it engages. X Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height Seats 108 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Seat heating and seat ventilation Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Switching the seat heating on/off : ; = ? Raises the backrest contour Softens the backrest contour Lowers the backrest contour Hardens the backrest contour G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back. Adjusting the AMG Performance Seat To adjust the contour of the seat and for improved lateral support, you can individually adjust the front seats. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat cushion X X To narrow: press button :. To broaden: press button ;. Adjusting the side bolsters of the seat backrest X X To narrow: press button =. To broaden: press button ?. The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. i If drive program E (Y page 159) is selected, the power of the seat heating is reduced. Seats 109 Switching the seat ventilation on/off Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have selected. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the slid- ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 96). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. i When the vehicle is stationary, the fan speed can be reduced automatically. This reduces the noises of the seat ventilation. Z 110 Steering wheel Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Seat heating or seat ven- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consumtilation has been ers are switched on. switched off prematurely X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the or cannot be switched rear window defroster or interior lighting. on. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat ventilation can be switched back on manually. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel Important safety notes Adjusting the steering wheel manually G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can still be adjusted when there is no key in the ignition lock. : Release lever ; To adjust the steering wheel height = To adjust the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) Push release lever : down completely. The steering column is unlocked. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. The steering column is locked. X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft direction. X Steering wheel 111 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the steering wheel electrically : To adjust the steering wheel position (fore- and-aft adjustment) ; To adjust the steering wheel height i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 112) settings (Y page 116) ROperating the on-board computer (Y page 236). RStoring Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Z 112 Steering wheel Problems with the steering wheel heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steering wheel heat- The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consuming has switched off pre- ers are switched on. maturely or cannot be X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the switched on. rear window defroster or interior lighting. EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if there is a risk of entrapment by the steering wheel. The adjustment process is stopped. Press one of the memory function position buttons. The adjustment process is stopped. This function is only available on vehicles with memory function. G WARNING If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in and out of your vehicle easier. You can activate and deactivate the EASYENTRY/EXIT feature using the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). Position of the steering wheel when the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The steering wheel swings upwards when you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Rwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door; KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1 Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver's door; the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 146) Ropen the driver's door when the ignition is switched off i The steering wheel only tilts upwards if the driving position is stored after the steering column adjustment has been adjusted (Y page 116). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory function (Y page 116). i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper steering limiter. Mirrors The steering wheel is moved to the last selected position when: Rthe driver's door is closed and you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock Ryou close the driver's door when the ignition is switched on Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO i The steering wheel only returns to the last set position if the driving position is stored after the seat or steering column has been adjusted (Y page 116). The most recent driving position of the steering wheel is stored if: Rthe ignition is switched off Rthe setting is stored with the memory function (Y page 116). Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened or the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). Mirrors X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : forwards or back. Exterior mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. This means that you could misjudge the distance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Adjusting the exterior mirrors Rear-view mirror Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Position of the steering wheel for driving 113 Mirrors 114 Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press button ; for the right-hand exterior mirror or button = for the left-hand exterior mirror. The indicator lamp lights up in the button that has been pressed. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button : as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustment button : up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field of vision. After the engine has been started, the exterior mirrors are automatically heated if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside temperature is low. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Folding the exterior mirrors in or out electrically Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Briefly press :. Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are always folded out fully while driving. They could otherwise vibrate. X i If you are driving faster than 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exterior mirrors. Setting the exterior mirrors If the battery has been disconnected or completely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not fold in when you select the Automatic Mirror Folding function in the multimedia system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Briefly press :. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically When the Automatic Mirror Folding function is activated in the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions): Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out automatically again as soon as you unlock the vehicle. i If the exterior mirrors have been folded in manually, they do not fold out. Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold button : until you hear a click and then the mirror engaging in position (Y page 114). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 113). Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. Mirrors If you come into contact with the electrolyte, observe the following: Using reverse gear RRinse The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if the following conditions are met simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps strikes the sensor in the rear-view mirror The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Parking position for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side Storing the parking position You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. You can store this position. : Memory button M ; Adjustment button = Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror ? Button for the driver's side exterior mirror Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the preset parking position. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side returns to the driving position. X Using the memory button You can store the parking position of the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using memory button M :. The reverse gear must not be engaged. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press button = for the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side. X Use adjustment button ; to adjust the exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. X Press memory button M : and one of the arrows on adjustment button ; within three seconds. The parking position is stored if the exterior mirror does not move. Z Seats, steering wheel and mirrors off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with electrolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 115 Memory function 116 If the mirror moves out of position, repeat the steps. X After successfully storing, reset the driving position of the exterior mirror. X Calling up a stored parking position setting Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Adjust the exterior mirror on the frontpassenger side using button =. X Engage reverse gear. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves to the stored parking position. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side moves back to its original position: Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) Rabout ten seconds after you have disengaged reverse gear Rif you press button ? for the exterior mirror on the driver's side Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X G WARNING Children could become trapped if they activate the memory function, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The memory function can be used at any time, e.g. even when the key is not in the ignition lock. Storing settings With the memory function, you can store up to three different settings, e.g. for three different people. The following settings are stored as a single memory preset: Rposition of the seat, backrest and head restraint Rdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger sides Rposition of the head-up display Memory function Important safety notes G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button. The adjustment process is stopped. Adjust the seat accordingly (Y page 106). On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 111) and the exterior mirrors (Y page 113). X Press memory button M and one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the settings have been completed. X X Memory function 117 Calling up a stored setting Press and hold the corresponding storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until: Rseat Rsteering wheel Rexterior mirrors Rhead-up display are in the stored position. i If you release the storage position button, the seat, steering wheel and mirror setting functions stop immediately. The adjustment of the head-up display is still carried out. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Z 118 Exterior lighting Exterior lighting General notes If you wish to drive during the daytime without lights, switch off the daytime running lamps function in the on-board computer (Y page 250). Setting the exterior lighting Setting options Exterior lighting can be set using the: switch Rcombination switch (Y page 119) Ron-board computer (Y page 250) Lights and windshield wipers Rlight Light switch Operation 1 W Left-hand standing lamps 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4 à Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps B R Rear fog lamp If you hear a warning tone when you leave the vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. X Turn the light switch to the à position. The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in position 0 in the ignition lock Automatic headlamp mode à is the favored light switch setting. The light setting is automatically selected according to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather conditions such as fog, snow or spray): RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running (USA only): if you have switched on the Daytime Running Lights function in the on-board computer, the daytime running lamps or the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. RWith the engine running (Canada only): depending on the ambient light, the daytime running lamps or the parking and low-beam headlamps are switched on or off automatically. X To switch on the automatic headlamps: turn the light switch to the à position. G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the lowbeam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. Canada only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. The daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. When the engine is running and the vehicle is stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/ low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the Exterior lighting light switch to the T position, the daytime running lamps and parking lamps switch on. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. USA only: The daytime running lamps improve the visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the daytime running lamps function must be switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 250). If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to the T or L position, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. Parking lamps Low-beam headlamps Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or it should be in position 0. X Turn the light switch to the W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X ((right-hand side of the vehicle) position. ! If the battery has been excessively dis- charged, the parking lamps or standing lamps are automatically switched off to enable the next engine start. Always park your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the continuous use of the T parking lamps for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. X To switch on: turn the light switch to the T position. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. Standing lamps Combination switch Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. : ; = ? High-beam headlamps Turn signal, right High-beam flasher Turn signal, left Z Lights and windshield wipers Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam headlamps switch on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to the L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to the L position. The green L indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. 119 Exterior lighting 120 To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. X To indicate: press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Lights and windshield wipers X Hazard warning lamps To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :. All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. X The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. Cornering light function The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. It can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or turn the steering wheel Rif you are driving at speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn the steering wheel The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes. Adaptive Highbeam Assist General notes You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and high beam automatically. The system recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either approaching from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to low beam. The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Important safety notes G WARNING Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize road users: Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high- Rwho Interior lighting Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off X X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above 25 km/h: If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road users have been detected: The high-beam headlamps are switched on automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up. If you are driving at speeds below approximately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: The high-beam headlamps are switched off automatically. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi- cator lamp in the multifunction display remains lit. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position or move the light switch to another position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Headlamps fogged up on the inside Certain climatic and physical conditions may cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This moisture does not affect the functionality of the headlamp. Interior lighting Lights and windshield wipers beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time. 121 Overview of interior lighting Front overhead control panel : p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off ; | To switch the automatic interior light- ing control on/off = c To switch the front interior lighting on/ off ? u To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off A p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off Z Replacing bulbs 122 Control panel in the grab handle (rear compartment) Replacing bulbs Important safety notes G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. Lights and windshield wipers : Reading lamp ; p To switch the reading lamp on/off Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. The bulb may explode if: Ryou touch it is hot Ryou drop it Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of the same type and the specified voltage. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub it off with a lint-free cloth. Protect bulbs from moisture during operation. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact with liquids. Only replace the bulbs listed (Y page 123). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance replacing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. Vehicles with LED headlamps: the front and rear light clusters of your vehicle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Rit Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are automatically deactivated after some time except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. The color, brightness and display lighting for the ambient lighting are set using the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). Automatic interior lighting control To switch on/off: press the | button. When the automatic interior lighting control is activated, the button is flush with the overhead control panel. The interior lighting automatically switches on if you: Runlock the vehicle Ropen a door Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. This delayed switch-off can be adjusted via the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). X Replacing bulbs You can replace the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend. Vehicles with halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PWY 24 W Tail lamp (halogen headlamps) : Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W ; Backup lamp: W 16 W Replacing front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlamps) Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing You must remove the cover of the front wheel housing before you can change the front turn signal lamp. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Turn rotary knob : 180° outwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is released. X Fold cover ; upwards. X To install: insert cover ; into the left, right and two lower catches. X Turn rotary knob : 180° inwards until it stops using a suitable object. Cover ; is locked. Low-beam headlamps Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X X Z Lights and windshield wipers Overview of bulb types 123 Replacing bulbs 124 Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it to the right. X Lights and windshield wipers High-beam headlamps Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 123). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise, unlock it and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : turn clockwise and lock. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 123). X Changing the rear bulbs Opening and closing the side trim panels Switch off the lights. Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull out. X Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise. X Press on housing cover : and turn it clockwise. X X Turn signal Example: right-hand side paneling You must open the side paneling in the trunk before you can replace the bulbs in the tail lamps. X To open: release right or left side paneling : at the top and fold it down in the direction of the arrow. X To close: insert side paneling :. Tail lamps Switch off the lights. Open the trunk. X Open the side trim panel (Y page 124). X X Windshield wipers 125 if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the Pull out the plug. Turn fender nut : 90° counter-clockwise and remove the bulb holder. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to Turn signal ;: press the bulb into the bulb holder gently, turn it counter-clockwise and remove it from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder and turn it clockwise. X Backup lamp =: remove the bulb from the bulb holder. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder. X Re-install bulb holder. X Turn fender nut : 90° clockwise. X Insert the connector. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 124). 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set X X optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. X to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast B í Single wipe î To wipe with washer fluid Windshield wipers Switching the windshield wiper on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass Switch on the ignition. Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position. Vehicles with a rain sensor: in the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is automatically set according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to wipe more frequently. X X Z Lights and windshield wipers windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Windshield wipers 126 If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent you from observing the traffic conditions. Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING Lights and windshield wipers If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the engine. Remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Set the windshield wiper to the ° position. X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until the windshield wiper starts. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, press the Start/Stop button. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Removing the wiper blades ! Never open the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/ rear window. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Hold on to the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn wiper blade in direction of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as it will go. X Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the removal position with a noticeable click. X ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper. Changing the windshield wiper blades Adjusting the wiper blades so that they are vertical On vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Set the windshield wiper to position °. X When the wiper arms have reached the vertical position, turn the SmartKey to position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X X Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow ? away from the wiper arm. Windshield wipers Installing the wiper blades i The duration of the color change varies depending on the terms of use. Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow :. Lights and windshield wipers X 127 Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow = until it engages in the locking position with a noticeable click. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. X Remove protective film : of the service indicator on the tip of the wiper blade. If the color of the service indicator changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. X Z 128 Windshield wipers Problems with the windshield wipers Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers are jammed. Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on. Lights and windshield wipers The windshield wipers fail completely. The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray noz- X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop. zles no longer hits the center of the windshield. Overview of climate control systems 129 Overview of climate control systems Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and air humidity in the vehicle interior. The interior filter cleans the air, thus improving the interior climate. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. Optimum climate control is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. If you start the engine using your smartphone, the last selected climate control setting is reactivated (Y page 149). The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 137). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 96). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired interior temperature will be reached more quickly. i The integrated filter filters out most parti- cles of dust and soot and completely filters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the interval for replacing the filter, which is specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it depends on environmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i It is possible that the blower may be activa- ted automatically 60 minutes after the SmartKey has been removed depending on various factors, e.g. the outside temperature. The vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to dry the climate control system. Climate control General notes 130 Overview of climate control systems Climate control Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control Example : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134) ; Sets the air distribution (Y page 134) = Sets the airflow (Y page 135) Switches off climate control (Y page 132) ? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133) A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135) B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302) PLUG-IN HYBRID: switch ! residual heat on/off (Y page 137) C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136) D All vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID: switch 0 synchronization on/off (Y page 135) PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate the & "immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 143) E Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137) F Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 133) G Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134) Overview of climate control systems 131 Climate control Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control Example Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 134) ; Sets the air distribution, left (Y page 134) = Sets the airflow (Y page 135) Switches off climate control (Y page 132) ? Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 133) A Defrosts the windshield (Y page 135) B Calls up the climate control menu of the multimedia system (Y page 302) Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 137) C Switches the rear window defroster on or off (Y page 136) D All vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID (Canada only): switch ¿ cooling with dehumidification E F G H I J on/off (Y page 133) PLUG-IN HYBRID: activate or deactivate & "immediate pre-entry climate control" (Y page 143) Switches air-recirculation mode manually on or off (Y page 137) Sets the air distribution, right (Y page 134) Sets the temperature, right (Y page 134) Rear control panel Sets the temperature (Y page 134) Display Sets the airflow (Y page 135) 132 Operating the climate control systems Notes on using automatic climate control Climate control Optimum use of the automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of the dual-zone or 3-zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is not activated automatically in automatic mode. If necessary, activate this function (Y page 133). RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RVehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control or PLUG-IN HYBRID: use the "residual heat" function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off. The residual heat function is switched off when the ignition is switched on. DYNAMIC SELECT switch (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) You can choose between various drive programs with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154). If you have selected drive program E: Rthe cooling output is reduced when cooling Rwhen heating, the electrical heater booster is deactivated and heat output is reduced as a result Rthe rear window defroster running time is reduced If you have selected drive program C, S or S+, the current climate settings are maintained. ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 151). Operating the climate control systems Activating/deactivating climate control General notes When the climate control is switched off, the air supply and air circulation are also switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only briefly Switch on climate control primarily using the à rocker switch (Y page 133). Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To switch on: set the airflow to level 1 or higher using the H rocker switch. X To switch off: set the airflow to level 0 using the H rocker switch. X i 3-zone automatic climate control: when climate control is switched off, "OFF" appears in the rear-compartment display. Operating the climate control systems 133 Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly. For vehicles without a hybrid drive system, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is available when the engine is running. For hybrid vehicles, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is also available via the electric refrigerant compressor when the engine is not running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. Activating/deactivating X Press the ¿ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out. Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp over Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a malthe ¿ rocker switch function. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The cooling with air dehumidification function cannot be activated via the multimedia system any longer (Y page 303). Setting climate control to automatic General notes In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air distribution. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated automatically in automatic mode. Automatic control Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Set the desired temperature using the w rocker switch on the front control unit. X To activate: press rocker switch à up or down. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up. X To switch to manual operation: press the H rocker switch up or down. or X Press the upper or lower section of the _ rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the à rocker switch goes out. In automatic mode, if you adjust the airflow or air distribution manually, the indicator lamp X Climate control General notes Operating the climate control systems 134 Climate control above the à rocker switch goes out. The function which has not been changed manually, however, continues to be controlled automatically. When the manually set function switches back to automatic mode, the indicator lamp above the à rocker switch lights up again. Adjusting the climate mode settings This function is only available with dual-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. In automatic mode you can select the following airflow settings for the driver's and frontpassenger areas: FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow, slightly warmer and draftfree setting X To set: set the climate mode using the multimedia system (Y page 303). Setting the temperature Dual-zone automatic climate control Dual-zone automatic climate control: the temperature for the driver's and front-passenger side can be set individually. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To increase or reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). 3-zone automatic climate control General notes You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. Setting the temperature in the front compartment using the front control panel Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To increase or reduce: press the w rocker switch up or down. X Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Setting the temperature in the rear compartment using the rear control panel Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To increase or reduce: press the upper or lower section of the w rocker switch on the rear control panel (Y page 131). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). The set temperature appears on the rearcompartment display. X Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents P Directs air through the center and side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs air through the center, side and footwell vents a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs air through the defroster, center, side and footwell vents b Directs air through the defroster, center and side air vents W Sets the air distribution to automatic Setting 3-zone automatic climate control: you can set the air distribution separately for the driver's and front-passenger side. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 146). X Press the _ rocker switch up or down. The various air distribution settings appear in the multimedia system. Operating the climate control systems Adjusting the front-compartment airflow Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To increase or reduce: press the H rocker switch up or down. X Setting the rear compartment airflow using the rear control panel It is only possible to set the airflow using the rear control panel on vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control. You can set the airflow separately for the front and rear compartment. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To increase or reduce: press the upper or lower section of the K or I rocker switch on the rear control panel. The selected airflow level appears in the rear display. 3-zone automatic climate control Activate or deactivate the "Synchronization" function using the multimedia system (Y page 304). The synchronization function is deactivated: Rif the settings for the front-passenger side are changed Rif the settings for the rear compartment are changed X Defrosting the windshield General notes You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to clear a fogged up windshield or front side windows on the inside. Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on or off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To activate: press the ¬ rocker switch on the front control unit up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch lights up. The current climate control settings are deactivated. The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off i If necessary, the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated. In this case, the indicator lamp above the ¿ rocker switch remains switched off. X To switch off: press the ¬ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¬ rocker switch goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated. X Activating or deactivating the synchronization function General notes The "Synchronization" function is only available with dual-zone automatic climate control and 3zone automatic climate control. Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side. For 3-zone automatic climate control, the temperature setting is adopted for the front-passenger side and rear compartment. Activating/deactivating Dual-zone automatic climate control Press the upper or lower section of the 0 rocker switch. The indicator lamp above the 0 rocker switch lights up or goes out. The synchronization function deactivates if the settings for the front-passenger side are changed. X Climate control Setting the airflow 135 Operating the climate control systems 136 Defrosting the windows Windows fogged up on the inside X Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function with the ¿ rocker switch. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the "Windshield defrosting" function using the ¬ rocker switch. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Climate control X Windows fogged up on the outside Activate the windshield wipers. Switch on automatic mode using the à rocker switch. i If you clean the windows regularly, they do not fog up so quickly. X X Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press the ¤ rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ¤ rocker switch lights up or goes out. X Operating the climate control systems 137 Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window defroster has deactivated prematurely or cannot be activated. X The battery has not been sufficiently charged. Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster can be activated again. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off General notes You can also temporarily deactivate the flow of fresh air manually if unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from outside. The air already inside the vehicle will then be recirculated. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the windows can fog up more quickly, in particular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent the windows from fogging up. Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To activate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch lights up. Air-recirculation mode switches on automatically: Rat high outside temperatures Rat high levels of pollution (3-zone automatic climate control only) Rin a tunnel (vehicles with a navigation system only) The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch is not lit when automatic air-recirculation mode is activated. Outside air is added after about 30 minutes. X To deactivate: press the g rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the g rocker switch goes out. X Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated Switching the residual heat on or off General notes The residual heat function is only available with 3-zone automatic climate control on vehicles for Canada. Once the engine is switched off, it is possible to make use of the residual heat of the engine to continue heating or ventilating the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes. The heating or ventilation time depends on the interior temperature that has been set. Switching on/off Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock or remove it (Y page 146). X To switch on: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch lights up. The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. X Climate control Problems with the rear window defroster Operating the climate control systems 138 To switch off: press the ! rocker switch up or down. The indicator lamp above the ! rocker switch goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Rif the battery voltage drops Climate control X Perfume atomizer Operating the perfume atomizer G WARNING If children open the vial, they could drink the perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. There is a risk of injury. Do not leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. If the perfume liquid has been drunk, consult a doctor. If perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse the eyes with clean water. If you continue to experience difficulties, consult a doctor. H Environmental note Full vials must not be disposed of with household waste. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of full vials in an environmentally responsible manner and take them to a harmful substance collection point. : Vial lid ; Vial The perfume atomizer helps to improve driving comfort. Via the multimedia system you can: Rswitch the perfume atomizer on or off (Y page 303) Rregulate the perfume intensity (Y page 303). The following conditions can affect your perception of the perfume intensity: Roperating mode of the climate control system Rinterior temperature Rtime of year or day Rair humidity Rphysiological condition of occupants, e.g. fatigue or hunger The perfume atomizer can only be operated when the climate control system is switched on and is only active when the glove box is closed. The perfume atomizer is provided with a pre-filled vial. You can also choose from a variety of filled perfume vials and an empty vial which you can fill yourself. If you refill an empty perfume vial, observe the separate information sheet attached to the vial. ! If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Do not refill the pre-filled perfume vial when it is empty. Dispose of the used vial after use. X To insert the perfume vial: open the glove box (Y page 309). X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. X To remove the perfume vial: pull out the perfume vial. Operating the climate control systems 139 To refill the perfume vial: unscrew the lid of the empty perfume vial to refill it yourself. X Refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the desired liquid perfume. X Screw the lid back on to the vial. X ! Only refill the vial when you are outside the Climate control vehicle. Otherwise, liquid perfume could drip into the interior and contaminate it. Always refill the empty refillable vial with the same perfume. Otherwise, you might not achieve optimum results from the perfume atomizer. Z 140 Operating the climate control systems Problems with the perfume atomizer Climate control Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The vehicle interior is not The perfume vial has not been pushed into the holder as far as it will perfumed although the go. perfume atomizer is acti- X Slide the perfume vial into the holder as far as it will go. vated. The perfume vial is not filled sufficiently. X Pre-filled vials: dispose of the empty vial. X Use a new pre-filled vial. X Refillable vials: refill the vial with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml) of the same perfume. The perfume atomizer is faulty. Have the perfume atomizer checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Ionization Ionization is used to purify the air in the vehicle interior and attain an improved interior climate. The ionization of the interior air is odorless and cannot be perceived directly in the vehicle interior. You can switch ionization on or off using the multimedia system (Y page 303). Ionization can only be operated when the automatic climate control is switched on. The side air vent on the driver's side must be open. Operating the climate control systems 141 Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey The "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. Before getting in, the driver's seat area or the whole interior can be briefly warmed or ventilated in advance with the air from the air vents being pre-cooled. The high-voltage battery must be sufficiently charged before "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" can be activated. When the vehicle is pre-cooled, the following functions are activated if required: RClimate control system RBlower RSeat ventilation When the vehicle is pre-heated, the following functions are activated if required: RClimate control system RBlower RSeat heating RSteering wheel heating RExterior mirror heating RRear window defroster If you have switched on the perfume atomizer or ionization using the multimedia system, these will be activated together with pre-entry climate control. Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303). Activate ionization (Y page 303). Activating or deactivating "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" Before "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" can be activated, you must activate the function via the multimedia system (Y page 303). X To activate pre-entry climate control via SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. The climate control functions are activated for up to 5 minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling. To deactivate "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey": "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" switches off automatically when the engine is started. The following functions remain active after the engine is started: RSeat heating (heating) RSeat ventilation (ventilation) RPerfume atomizer RIonization An activated "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" function can be deactivated using the rocker switch (Y page 143). Z Climate control General notes 142 Operating the climate control systems Problems with "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" cannot be switched on or has switched itself off. The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is under the specified minimum condition of charge. X Start the engine when the vehicle is at a standstill. The engine powers the electric motor. The electric motor operates as a generator. The high-voltage battery is being charged. Further information on charging the high-voltage battery via: Ra mains socket (Y page 171) Ra charging station (Y page 174) Ra wallbox (Y page 173) Climate control Problem "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey" has been started more than twice with the engine switched off. X Switch on the engine and let it run for more than ten seconds. X Try again to switch on "Pre-entry climate control via SmartKey". Pre-entry climate control at time of departure Important safety notes G WARNING If persons, particularly children are subjected to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. General notes The "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. You can use the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function to cool or heat the vehicle interior if the engine is not running. The "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function can be activated regardless of whether or not the vehicle is connected to an electric power supply. The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery must be higher than the specified minimum condition of charge, however. When the vehicle is connected to an electric power supply, priority is given to charging the high-voltage battery to the specified minimum charge. "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" is only activated subsequently. The running time of the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function may be reduced if: Rthe vehicle is not connected to an electric power supply and Rthe high-voltage battery is not fully charged With active "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" the condition of charge of the highvoltage battery can be reduced, even if the charge cable connector is connected. When the vehicle is cooled, the following functions are activated if required: RClimate control system RBlower RSeat ventilation When the vehicle is heated, the following functions are activated if required: RClimate control system RBlower RSeat heating RSteering wheel heating RExterior mirror heating RRear window defroster If you have switched on the perfume atomizer or the ionization using the multimedia system, these will be activated together with the "Preentry climate control at departure time". Air vents Setting the departure time You can set the departure time using the onboard computer or via the online access to the vehicle. The activation of the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function can be linked to this departure time. Your vehicle will then be cooled or heated until the desired temperature is reached in time for the set departure time. "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" will be activated a maximum of 55 minutes before departure. If the departure is delayed, the vehicle will be heated or cooled for another five minutes. X To set the departure time: set the departure time using the on-board computer (Y page 249). Set the departure time via the online access to the vehicle (Y page 176). X To activate or deactivate "Pre-entry climate control at departure time": activate or deactivate "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" via the multimedia system (Y page 303). Set the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" via the online access to the vehicle (Y page 176). When activating the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function: you can select whether only the driver's area or also the frontpassenger area should be heated or cooled. The "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function switches off automatically when the vehicle is started. The following functions remain active: RSeat heating RSeat ventilation RSteering wheel heating RPerfume atomizer RIonization Switching off "Pre-entry climate control at departure time": the activated "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" can be switched off using the rocker switch (Y page 143). Activating or deactivating "Immediate pre-entry climate control" using the rocker switch You can activate "Immediate pre-entry climate control" even if the vehicle interior is already at the desired temperature. This means, for example, that the vehicle interior continues to be cooled or heated if the journey is interrupted for up to 50 minutes and the interior temperature is kept constant. Climate control Activate the perfume atomizer (Y page 303). Activate ionization (Y page 303). 143 To activate or deactivate "Immediate preentry climate control": press rocker switch : up or down. The blue or red indicator lamp above the rocker switch lights up or goes out. The colors of the indicator lamps in rocker switch : have the following meanings: X Rblue: cooling activated heating activated Ryellow: departure time is preselected Rred: Air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes: Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield and the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles in the vehicle interior. Z Air vents 144 Climate control Setting the air vents Example : Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent, left = Control for left side air vent To open or close: turn thumbwheel = to the left or right as far as it will go. X To adjust the air direction: hold side air vent ; by thumbwheel = and move it up or down or to the left or right. X Driving Important safety notes The sensor system of some driving and driving safety systems adjusts automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. The first 1000 miles (1500 km) The more you look after the engine when it is new, the more satisfied you will be with its performance in the future. RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km). RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle, during this period. RWhen changing gears manually, change up in good time, before the tachometer needle reaches Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brake the vehicle. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown). RAll vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in drive program E. Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km). ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. RChange gear in good time. RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C. After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Always observe the maximum permissible speed. Self-locking rear axle differential (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking differential on the rear axle. Change the oil to improve protection of the rear axle differential: Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles (3,000 km) Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years These oil changes prolong the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving Important safety notes G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. Rshoes Z Driving and parking Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 145 Driving and parking 146 Driving G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. SmartKey positions SmartKey G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. Rlose ! Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum engine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine. To protect the engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is cold. Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 44). g To remove the SmartKey 1 Power supply for some consumers, such as the windshield wipers 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) and drive position 3 To start the engine i The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started. Vehicles with AIRPANEL: you can open the shutters in the radiator trim by turning the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. After approximately 120 seconds the shutters open automatically. Further information on opening and cleaning the shutters (Y page 339). Start/Stop button General notes When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the case if you are not depressing the brake pedal. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts immediately. A check which periodically establishes a radio connection between the vehicle and the SmartKey determines whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when starting the engine. To start the vehicle without actively using the SmartKey: Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock. Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle. Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 82). Do not keep the SmartKey: Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil. Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case. This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey's remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a short time: Ryou will not be able to switch on the ignition with the Start/Stop button. Ryou will not be able to start the engine with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is unlocked again. If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button on the front door (Y page 88), you can continue to start the engine with the Start/Stop button. The engine can be switched off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Key positions with the Start/Stop button : Start/Stop button ; Ignition lock the engine or lights up while driving (Y page 288). If Start/Stop button : has not yet been pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey being removed from the ignition. X To switch on the power supply: press Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can now activate the windshield wipers, for example. The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. The ignition is switched off again if: Ryou do not start the engine from this position within 15 minutes Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position The power supply is switched off again if: Rthe driver's door is opened and Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice when in this position Removing the Start/Stop button You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal using the SmartKey. It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operation when the transmission is in position P. X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition lock ;. You do not have to remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock when you leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/ Stop button Rthe electrically powered equipment can be operated As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. Further information on situations where an indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting Z 147 Driving and parking Driving 148 Driving Starting the engine Important safety notes Driving and parking G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshifting the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. General notes The catalytic converter is preheated for up to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position P (Y page 156). The transmission position display in the multifunction display shows P (Y page 157). i You can start the engine in transmission position P and N. Starting procedure with the SmartKey To start the engine using the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock and release it as soon as the engine is running (Y page 146). If the engine will not start: Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Reinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock after a short waiting period. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up (Y page 286). X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock (Y page 146) and release it as soon as the engine is running. X X Starting procedure with the Start/Stop button The Start/Stop button is only available on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEYLESS-GO start function. The Start/Stop button can be used to start the vehicle manually without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for starting the engine operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine start function. You can start the engine if a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always take the SmartKey with you when leaving the Driving Starting procedure via smartphone Observe the important safety notes on starting the engine (Y page 148). You can also start your engine via your smartphone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the previously selected climate control setting is activated. In this way you can cool or heat the interior of the vehicle before starting the journey. Only start the engine via your smartphone if it is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. Observe the legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked. Engine start via smartphone may be limited to certain countries or regions. You can execute a maximum of two consecutive starting attempts via your smartphone. If you insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock, you can carry out two more starting attempts. Once you have started the engine, you can switch the engine off via your smartphone at any time. You can only start the engine via your smartphone if: Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock Rpark position P is selected Rthe accelerator pedal is not depressed Rthe anti-theft alarm system is not activated Rthe panic alarm is not activated Rthe hazard warning lamps are switched off Rthe hood is closed. Rthe doors are closed and locked Rthe windows and sliding sunroof are closed Also make sure that: Rthe fuel tank is sufficiently filled Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged G WARNING Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during ser- vice or maintenance work. There is a risk of injury. Always secure the engine against unintentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone before carrying out maintenance or repairs. You can prevent an engine start via your smartphone, for example, if you: Rswitch on the hazard warning lamps Rdo not lock the doors Ropen the hood. Pulling away General notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling away. The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down. You can open the doors from the inside at any time. You can also deactivate the automatic locking feature, see the Digital Operator's Manual. It is only possible to shift the transmission from position P to the desired position if you depress the brake pedal. Only then is the parking lock released. If you do not depress the brake pedal, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the parking lock remains engaged. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. Information on the automatic release of the electric parking brake (Y page 178). Z Driving and parking vehicle, even if you only leave it for a short time. Pay attention to the important safety notes. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press the Start/Stop button once (Y page 146). The engine starts. 149 150 Driving Driving and parking Hill start assist Hill start assist helps you when pulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist is not active if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. RESP® is malfunctioning. ECO start/stop function (all vehicles except PLUG‑IN HYBRID) Introduction This section describes the ECO start/stop function for all vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. Information on the ECO start/stop function on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 231). The ECO start/stop function switches the engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped under certain conditions. The engine starts automatically when the driver wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. There is a risk of accident and injury. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the ignition and secure the vehicle against rolling away. General notes : ECO start/stop display The ECO start/stop function is activated whenever you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function is only available in drive program C. Automatic engine switch-off If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. The ECO start/stop function is operational when: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior has been reached. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe system detects that the windshield is not fogged up when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. Driving Deactivating or activating the ECO start/stop function All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Driving and parking The HOLD function can also be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic stop phase. When you depress the accelerator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD function is deactivated. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times in a row (initial stop, then three subsequent stops). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is unlimited. Automatic engine start The engine starts automatically if: Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button switch to drive program S+ (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Ryou switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 161) (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Rin transmission position D or N the brake pedal is released and the HOLD function is not active Ryou depress the accelerator pedal Ryou engage reverse gear R Ryou move the transmission out of position P Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the driver's door Rthe vehicle starts to roll Rthe brake system requires this Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior deviates from the set range Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. Ryou 151 To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. Selecting drive program S+ deactivates the ECO start/stop function. If you press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. Mercedes-AMG vehicles To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; goes out. X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then Z Driving and parking 152 Driving not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. The ECO start/stop function is deactivated, if: Ryou switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154) Ryou permanently activate manual gearshifting (Y page 161) If you have permanently activated manual gearshifting and then press ECO button :, the ECO start/stop function is activated. AMG sports exhaust system (Mercedes AMG vehicles) You can choose between different AMG sports exhaust system volumes using the position of the exhaust flap. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the quietest setting is activated. Setting the volume: X Press button :. If you select the loudest setting, indicator lamp lights up ;. You can also adjust the position of the exhaust flap using the: RDYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154) Rmultimedia system Driving 153 Problems with the engine Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not start. The starter motor can be heard. RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. is a malfunction in the fuel supply. Before attempting to start the engine again: X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or discharged. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 352). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 148). If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine is not running There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical smoothly and is misfircomponent of the engine management system. ing. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The coolant temperature The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no gauge shows a value longer being cooled sufficiently. above 248 ‡ (120 †). X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 333). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Z Driving and parking The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter motor. RThere DYNAMIC SELECT switch 154 DYNAMIC SELECT switch Driving and parking All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles and PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control: - the climate control settings - the rear window defroster operation period - the performance of the seat heating Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 148). Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics E Economy Particularly economical driving characteristics Additional information for drive programs (Y page 159). You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 161). PLUG‑IN HYBRID Information on the DYNAMIC SELECT switch on PLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 229). Mercedes-AMG vehicles General information Select the drive program using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Available drive programs: Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or back until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. X RACE (S‑MODEL) Driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty driving characteristics S Sport Sporty driving characteristics C Comfort Comfortable and economical driving characteristics I Individual Individual settings Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine management) Rthe transmission management Automatic transmission Rthe suspension Rthe position of the exhaust flap Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe driver assistance systems Rthe availability of gliding mode Further information for automatic drive program characteristics (Y page 159). Additionally, in drive program I you can configure the respective vehicle characteristics using the multimedia system. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Each time you start the engine with the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 148). Selecting the drive program Push DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forward or back until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. You can also change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 161). X Additional settings Position of the exhaust flap (Y page 152) ECO start/stop function (Y page 150) ESP® (Y page 73) Suspension (Y page 197) Permanent activation of manual gearshifting (Y page 161) When you press buttons : - A the corresponding setting is selected. The DYNAMIC SELECT switch setting is overwritten. These settings will also be maintained if you change with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch in drive program RACE (S-MODEL), S+, S or C. If you switch to drive program I, all stored characteristics will be accepted. This is also the case if you have previously pressed one of buttons : - A. : ; = ? A Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Z Driving and parking RESP® 155 156 Automatic transmission After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Driving and parking Observe the important safety notes for PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 44). DIRECT SELECT lever Overview of transmission positions Engaging park position P automatically Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or front-passenger door Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R Under certain conditions, the automatic transmission shifts automatically to transmission position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe the information on the HOLD function (Y page 195) and on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 189). Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. If the transmission is in position D or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance. The ECO start/stop function is not available when reverse gear is engaged. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 150). X j k i h Park position with parking lock Reverse gear Neutral Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the steering column. The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display in the multifunction display (Y page 157). Engaging park position P ! If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P. The automatic transmission could otherwise be damaged. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction of arrow P. Shifting to neutral N G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of park position P RStart the engine. Rshifting Automatic transmission If the transmission is in position D or R: push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Transmission position and drive program display The current transmission position and drive program appear in the multifunction display. X : Status symbol drive program ; Transmission position = Gear The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever. If the transmission position display in the multifunction display is not working, you should pull away carefully to check whether the desired transmission position is engaged. For this purpose, we recommend selecting transmission position D and drive program E (drive program C in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) or S. Engaging drive position D If the transmission is in position R or N: push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X If the transmission is in position P: depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. X Z Driving and parking There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. 157 158 Automatic transmission Transmission positions Driving and parking B C Park position This prevents the vehicle from rolling away when stopped. Only shift the transmission into position P when the vehicle is stationary (Y page 156). The parking lock should not be used as a brake when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addition to the parking lock in order to secure the vehicle. Park position P is automatically engaged if: Ryou switch off the engine using the SmartKey and remove the SmartKey Ryou switch off the engine using the key or using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door or frontpassenger door Rthe driver's door is opened when the vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in position D or R If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission may be locked in position P. Have the vehicle electronics checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Reverse gear Only shift the transmission into position R when the vehicle is stationary. A Neutral Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be damaged. No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage the drive train. 7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Driving tips Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Double-clutch function When shifting down, the double-clutch function is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function reduces load change reactions and is conducive to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by the double-clutch function depends on the drive program selected. Kickdown Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts back up. Rocking the vehicle free Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and forth between transmission positions D and R can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine management restricts switching between transmission positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the point of resistance. Gliding mode (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Gliding mode can be activated under the following conditions: Rthe speed is within a suitable range. Rthe course of the road is suitable, e.g. there are no steep up or downhill gradients. Ryou are no longer depressing the accelerator pedal. Gliding mode is deactivated under the following conditions: Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. Ryou depress the brake pedal. Ryou use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position (Y page 156). Ryou switch to drive program RACE (S‑MODEL), S+ or S (Y page 154). Ryou activate manual gearshifting (Y page 161). Ryou leave the suitable speed range. i If you have selected the "Comfort" setting for the drive (engine management) in drive program I, you can also activate gliding mode. You can find information about this in the Digital Operator's Manual. Drive programs All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles) Drive program I (Individual) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Rthe Gliding mode is characterized by the following: Rthe combustion engine is disconnected from the drive train. Rthe engine speed corresponds to the idling speed. Rstatus icon C goes out and status icon : is displayed in the multifunction display (Y page 157). In drive program C, you can deactivate and activate gliding mode using the ECO button (Y page 151). drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe availability of the ECO start/stop function Rthe climate control: Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddle shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the drive. Z 159 Driving and parking Automatic transmission Driving and parking 160 Automatic transmission Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) Drive program E (Economy) Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Drive program E is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving Rthe characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. vehicle exhibits comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rduring deceleration, the engine is disconnected from the drive train. The vehicle uses kinetic energy and consumes less fuel (overrun mode). Rthe performance of air-conditioning system and heating are reduced. Mercedes-AMG vehicles Drive program RACE (S‑MODEL) The RACE drive program is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits driving characteristics suitable for the racetrack. Rall vehicle systems are set for maximum sportiness. Rthe gearshift recommendation gives you information for slowly warming up the drive assemblies and for adopting a fuel-efficient driving style (Y page 161). You can follow the gearshift recommendations at all times and shift gear accordingly using the steering wheel paddle shifters. On the basis of the gearshift recommendation, using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can optimize the drive train and engine operating mode at any time. Rif you have selected a gear manually, this will be maintained until the vehicle speed increases or decreases dramatically. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Automatic transmission suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. The vehicle is driven in the low engine speed range and the wheels are less likely to spin. Rgliding mode is available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is available. Drive program S+ (Sport Plus) In drive program I the following properties of the drive program can be selected: Drive program S+ is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits particularly sporty driving characteristics. vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits particularly stiff springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Rthe Drive program I (Individual) Rthe drive (engine management) transmission management RESP® (Y page 73) Rthe suspension Ractivation of the exhaust flap Information about configuring drive program I with the multimedia system can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Rthe i To permanently select the gears in drive program I using the steering wheel paddles, select the M (manual) setting for the transmission. Drive program S (Sport) Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle exhibits sporty driving characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear. Rthe automatic transmission shifting up later. the fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic transmission shift points. Rthe suspension exhibits hard springing and damping settings (vehicles with AIRMATIC). Rgliding mode is not available. Rthe ECO start/stop function is not available. Drive program C (Comfort) Drive program C is characterized by the following: Rthe vehicle delivers comfortable, economical handling characteristics. Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully. Rthe vehicle having improved driving stability, for example on slippery road surfaces. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner. Manual gear shifting General notes You can change gear yourself using the steering wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be in position D. Depending on which paddle shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission immediately shifts into the next gear down or up, if permitted. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shifting, you have two options: Rtemporary setting Rpermanent setting If you activate manual gearshifting, the multifunction display will show the current gear instead of transmission position D. If manual gearshifting is deactivated, the gears will be selected automatically. Z Driving and parking Rthe 161 Automatic transmission 162 Temporary setting To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X X or Driving and parking X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever to position D. X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter : or ;. X If position D (automatic transmission) is selected for the transmission in drive program I: shift to drive program I with the DYNAMIC SELECT switch. Indicator lamp ; goes out. Shifting gears ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Further information on activating manual gearshifting on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles (Y page 229). Temporary setting will be active for a certain amount of time. Under certain conditions the minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase or when driving on steep terrain. X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ; and hold it in place. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. or X Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) To deactivate: press button :. To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle shifter ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles): if the maximum engine speed on the currently engaged gear is reached and you continue to accelerate, the automatic transmission automatically shifts up in order to prevent engine damage. X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle shifter :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic down shifting occurs when coasting. X Automatic transmission Shift recommendation The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction display. X Shift to recommended gear ; according to gearshift recommendation : when shown in the multifunction display of the instrument cluster. Kickdown For maximum acceleration, depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters. If you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. Mercedes-AMG vehicles: kickdown is only possible in the temporary setting. X Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ! The automatic transmission does not shift up automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is reached. When the engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine from overrevving. Always make sure that the engine speed does not reach the red area of the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the multifunction display. X When message : appears in the multifunction display, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. Z Driving and parking If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. 163 164 Refueling Driving and parking Problems with the transmission Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has problems shifting gear. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no lon- X Stop the vehicle. ger changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation (Y page 233). Transfer case Refueling This section is only valid for vehicles with 4wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles. Important safety notes ! Performance tests may only be carried out Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be damaged. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for a performance test. ! Since ESP® engages automatically, the igni- tion must be switched off (the SmartKey or Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if: Rthe electric parking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer Rthe vehicle is being towed with only one axle raised (not permitted for vehicles with 4MATIC). The brake system could otherwise be damaged. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. G WARNING G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Refueling RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 388). Refueling General information Pay attention to the important safety notes (Y page 164). PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: pressure in the fuel tank must be released before refueling. Except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside, the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Preparing to refuel Switch off the engine. Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. or, if the SmartKey is inserted in the ignition lock: X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X X Opening the fuel filler flap (except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the fuel system. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection system could be blocked by particles from the fuel can. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. : To open the fuel filler flap ; To insert the fuel filler cap Z Driving and parking If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: 165 Refueling 166 = Tire pressure table ? Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled i From a speed of 2 km/h, the fuel filler cap Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. i The opening process for the fuel filler cap Driving and parking X Opening the fuel filler flap (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) X Pull switch :. Indicator lamp ; flashes and the Please Wait Depressurizing Tank message appears in the multifunction display. If the fuel filler cap is open, indicator lamp ; lights up. The Tank is Depressurized Ready for Refueling message appears in the multifunction display. Please be sure to observe the information on refueling on the fuel filler flap. There is a malfunction if: Rindicator lamp ; first flashes and then goes out Rthe yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp lights up can no longer be opened. may take up to 15 minutes. : ; = ? To open the fuel filler flap To insert the fuel filler cap Tire pressure table Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out. X Closing the fuel filler flap Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. If you drive at speeds above 2 km/h with the fuel filler flap open, the Fuel Filler Flap Open message is shown in the multifunction display. Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. X i For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 293). i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 271). Refueling 167 Driving and parking In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 293). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 293). Z 168 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Problems with fuel and the fuel tank Problem Driving and parking Fuel is leaking from the vehicle. Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. Risk of explosion or fire. X Apply the electric parking brake. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The fuel filler flap cannot The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. be opened. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81). X PLUG-IN HYBRID Vehicles: depressurize the fuel tank (Y page 165). The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 83). The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a critical value. In this case flammable gas escapes through a ventilation valve on the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. G DANGER If you use incorrectly installed mains sockets or adapters, extension cables or similar to connect the charging cable to a mains socket, Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) ROnly connect the charging cable to mains sockets that: - are installed correctly and - have been approved by an electrical specialist. RFor safety reasons, only use the charging cables supplied with the vehicle, or charging cables which have been approved for use with this vehicle. RNever use a damaged charging cable. RDo not use: - Extension cables - Cable drums - Multiple sockets RDo not use a socket adapter to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception is if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. RAlways observe the safety notes in the socket adapter's operating instructions. G DANGER Connecting the charging cable to the wallbox via an incorrectly installed wallbox or adapter, extension cable or similar could cause a fire or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, observe the following: ROnly connect the charging cable to a wallbox that: - is installed correctly and - has been approved by an electrical specialist. RFor safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the highvoltage battery in an electric vehicle. RNever use damaged charging cables. not extend the charging cable. RDo not use an adapter. RAlways observe the safety notes in the wallbox's operating instructions. RDo The vehicle's high voltage electrical system is under high voltage. RDo not tamper with the high-voltage components or the orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system. RDo not touch high-voltage components or the orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system when a vehicle has been involved in a crash. RNever touch damaged components or the damaged orange cables of the high-voltage electrical system. RDo not remove the covers of the high-voltage electrical system components that are marked with a warning sticker. General notes Method of operation The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage battery for driving. The high-voltage battery stores the energy needed to operate the electric motor and releases it again. The electric motor uses energy that has been stored in the high-voltage battery when pulling away, accelerating and during the journey. In overrun mode, kinetic energy is converted by means of energy recuperation into electrical energy and stored in the high-voltage battery. Information on overrun mode (Y page 232). The high-voltage battery can be charged as follows: Rthrough energy recuperation while the vehicle is in motion Rthrough the combustion engine while driving in CHARGE operating mode (Y page 226) Rwith the relevant charging cable at an electrical outlet while the vehicle is stationary Rwith the relevant charging cable at a wallbox while the vehicle is stationary Rwith the relevant charging cable at a charging station while the vehicle is stationary Z Driving and parking this could lead to fires or an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. To avoid hazardous situations, observe the following: 169 170 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Driving and parking The high-voltage battery can be charged in a nominal voltage range from 100 V to 240 V. You can view the condition of charge of the highvoltage battery in the multifunction display. You can find information in "PLUG-IN HYBRID operation", section "Menus and submenus" under "Energy flow display" (Y page 227). High and low outside temperatures Low outside temperatures At very low outside temperatures the maximum power output of the high-voltage battery may be reduced. The high-voltage battery is then no longer able to provide the normal electrical power output. High outside temperatures To prevent damage to the high-voltage battery due to very high outside temperatures, the maximum power output of the high-voltage battery is reduced by the vehicle. Energy consumption and electrical range The maximum electrical range is generally reduced by: Rhigh and low outside temperatures Roperating the climate control system Rswitching on consumers The battery's physical characteristics are such that leaving the vehicle parked for long periods at low outdoor temperatures without charging it can lead to: Ra reduction in battery performance Rlonger charge times Notes on battery care Avoid storing or transporting the vehicle at excessively high or low temperatures over a long period. If you park the vehicle and leave it stationary for long periods: Rcheck the condition of charge of the highvoltage battery more often Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply This prevents self-discharge and damage to the high-voltage battery. Terms of use Please note the information on exceptions and limitations in warranty documentation and in the Maintenance Booklet. Handling the charging cable and charging cable controls Do not leave the charging cable controls (Y page 171) hanging loose from an electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in a poor contact with the electrical outlet and malfunctions when charging the vehicle. To ensure that the brackets within the charging cable controls are not subjected to incorrect loads, observe the following: RNever lift or carry the controls by the charging cable connector or the mains plug. RTo transport the charging cable, the coiled part can be: - wrapped around the controls or - secured to the housing of the controls Heat generated by the charging cable and charging cable connector Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 168). During the charging process, the charging cable and charging cable connector may heat up. The charging cable and charging cable connector will only heat up within the permissible limiting values, provided that: Rthe power supply and the charging cable are not damaged Rthe instructions for handling the charging cable and controls on the charging cable are observed If the charging cable or plug get too hot, have the mains power supply checked. Protection device against overvoltage ! Overvoltage in the mains supply may dam- age the vehicle. For this reason, the vehicle is equipped with a protection device against overvoltage in the mains supply. This device may be triggered during severe thunderstorms, for example, and may lead to the building's fuse being tripped and an interruption in the power supply. These functions protect the vehicle. After the building fuse is switched Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) General information about the charging procedure Information on charging at a charging station (Y page 174). Stowing the charging cable The charging cable can be stowed in the bag supplied in the trunk/cargo compartment of the vehicle and held in place with the Velcro fastener. Driving and parking on again, the charging process resumes automatically. Following an interruption in the power supply or tripping of the building's fuse, it may take up to 10 minutes for charging to resume automatically. Switch on the building protection system again after it has been triggered. Otherwise, the charging process cannot be continued. Controls on the charging cable Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 168). The vehicle socket is located in the rear bumper on the right below the tail lamp. The charge socket flap and the vehicle are centrally locked or unlocked simultaneously. Charging the high-voltage battery via the electrical outlet Charging cable for electrical outlets Important safety notes ! Only use the charging cable to charge the high-voltage battery. Do not use the charging cable for other purposes. It may otherwise be damaged. A charging cable for connection to the electrical outlet is included with the vehicle. Only use the charging cable included with the vehicle or charging cables that have been approved for the vehicle. i If you use the supplied 12 A charging cable to charge a high-voltage battery: Rthe charge time increases considerably Relectrical consumption increases considerably Where possible, charge the high-voltage battery at a charging station (Y page 174). Only then can certified electrical energy consumption levels be reached. 171 : ; = ? Alternating current status indicator Control/protection system indicator Charge current indicator Charge current setting button When displays : and ; on the charging cable light up, this means the following: Display : Lights up green The external power supply connection is working properly. The high-voltage battery can be charged. Flashes red A malfunction has been detected in the external power supply. The high-voltage battery is recharged as soon as the electricity signal registers normal values. Lights up red There is a malfunction. The charging cable must be removed from the mains socket and then reinserted. i The charging process can vary depending on the power supply. Therefore, always observe the local information. Information about charging from a wallbox (Y page 173). Z 172 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) i The value of the maximum setting and the Driving and parking Display ; Lights up green There are no malfunctions. The high-voltage battery can be charged. Lights up red An impermissible current is being supplied to the control unit. The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. i For information on problems relating to the charging process, see (Y page 175). Setting the maximum charge current G WARNING If the charge current draw via a mains socket is too high during the charging process, the external electrical system may overheat. There is a risk of fire. Before beginning the charging process, check the maximum permissible charge current locally. Consult a qualified expert to do so where necessary. If necessary, adjust your vehicle's settings. ! An excessive charge current can blow a fuse or lead to overheating of the external power supply. Check whether the external power supply is compatible with the set charge current. If necessary, lower the set charge current or use another power socket. You can set a limit for the values of the charge current used in charging the high-voltage battery. This acts as a means of preventing the power supply from overloading. You can set this limit by using the controls on the charging cable or in the on-board computer's menu. Only set the maximum charge current in the on-board computer menu if there are no charge current settings on the charging cable. The default standard value in the vehicle corresponds to the maximum charge current value. The default standard value on the charging cable is the minimum charge current setting. This corresponds to the minimum available charge current from the power supply. The value on the charging cable can be increased and is described in the following section. adjustment value may vary depending on the country. Before charging the high-voltage battery, check the maximum permissible charge current for the relevant power socket. X To adjust the setting: press button ? repeatedly until the desired setting is selected in display =. RTwo LEDs are flashing: minimum setting RAll LEDs are flashing: maximum setting If, after the charging process, the charging cable is: Rleft connected to the power socket, the currently selected values will be used for the next charging process. Rremoved from the power socket, the values will be reset to the minimum setting for the next charging process. You may then need to reset the values of the maximum charge current. i If the vehicle requires more time than usual when charging, check the maximum charge current settings using the controls on the charging cable or in the on-board computer's menu. Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket When the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket lights up, this means the following: Indicator lamp Flashes orange The connection between the vehicle and the current source is being established before charging begins. Flashes green The high-voltage battery is being charged. Flashes red A malfunction has occurred while charging. The indicator lamp goes out after approximately 90 seconds. Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Press fastener ; to the left. Socket cap = is open. X Insert the power supply plug into the electrical outlet to the stop. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket ? to the stop. Indicator lamp A first flashes orange and then green. The high-voltage battery is being charged. Lights up orange A charging break for the highvoltage battery is taking place. The indicator lamp goes out after approximately 90 seconds. Lights up green The high-voltage battery is fully charged. The indicator lamp goes out after approximately 90 seconds. i If the indicator lamp is off, lock or unlock the vehicle. The indicator lamp then displays the current status of the charging process again. Connecting the charging cable i If the charging cable is plugged in, you cannot start the engine or move the vehicle. i Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. Removing the charging cable The high-voltage battery is fully charged when: Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in the multifunction display (Y page 227) Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lights up green after unlocking or locking the vehicle X Unlock the vehicle. X Press and hold button B on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. Close socket cap =. Close charge socket flap :. X Remove the mains plug from the mains socket and safely stow away the charging cable inside the vehicle (Y page 171). X X Charging the high-voltage battery from the wallbox General notes Shift the transmission to position P. Switch the ignition off. X Press the charge socket flap in the direction of arrow :. The charge socket flap swings up. X It is recommended that you charge your vehicle using a wallbox or at a charging station. Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 168). Z Driving and parking X Indicator lamp X 173 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 174 Connecting the charging cable X X X Driving and parking X Unlock the vehicle. Press and hold button B on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. Close socket cap =. Close charge socket flap :. Charging the high-voltage battery at the charging station Before beginning the charging process at a charging station without communication capabilities, you must first activate the station, e.g. using an RFID card. Observe the on-site operator instructions for the charging station. The connection for the vehicle at a charging station is identical to the connection on a wallbox (Y page 173). Shift the transmission to position P. Switch the ignition off. X Press the charge socket flap in direction of arrow :. The charge socket flap swings up. X Press fastener ; to the left. Socket cap = is open. X Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket ? to the stop. Indicator lamp A first flashes orange and then green. The high-voltage battery is being charged. X X i If the charging cable is plugged in, you cannot start the engine or move the vehicle. i Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. Removing the charging cable The high-voltage battery is fully charged when: Rthe charge level display reaches 100% in the multifunction display (Y page 227) Rthe indicator lamp in the vehicle socket lights up green after unlocking or locking the vehicle Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) 175 Problems with the charging process Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The charge socket flap cannot be opened. X The charge socket flap is not unlocked. Unlock the vehicle (Y page 81). X or X Unlock the driver's door using the mechanical key (Y page 83). Unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside (Y page 88). The charge socket flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Lock the vehicle and unlock it again. If, after that, the opening mechanism is still jammed: X The high-voltage battery is not being charged. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The indicator lamp on the vehicle socket does not light up or flashes red. A malfunction has occurred during the initialization of the charging process or during charging. X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket and plug it back into the vehicle socket. If the problem persists: X Use a different charging station. or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The high-voltage battery The electrical outlet is faulty. is not charged during the X Have the electrical outlet checked to test if it is functioning propcharging process when erly. connected to a power or socket. X Use a different electrical outlet. The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the vehicle socket. The snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked. X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector. The snap fastener on the vehicle socket is unlocked. X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. If the snap fastener on the charging cable connector is locked: X Press and hold the button on the charging cable connector and try to release the lock. Z Driving and parking If the key battery is discharged: 176 Charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Online access to the vehicle General information Driving and parking G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. i Operation of integrated information sys- tems and communications equipment in the vehicle: you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. You can call up remote query and remote configuration functions for your vehicle using online access to the vehicle. This is possible from an Internet-enabled computer, as well as many modern smartphones. Please call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) to obtain the relevant Internet address. Online access to the vehicle is restricted to the contractual periods of mbrace. Activated access to the mbrace emergency call system is required for use. In order to be able to use online access to the vehicle, you must agree to the local terms of use. Further information on supported devices, available languages and contractual periods can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to be able to call up online access to the vehicle, the vehicle must be connected to the Internet (Y page 176). Notes on data protection Remember that online access to the vehicle offers access to your data. i Prevent unauthorized persons from accessing this data. Every person who has access to the information stated can use the functions of the online access to the vehicle. i Information when selling a vehicle or buying a used vehicle: RIf you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to delete the vehicle from your personal area on the online access to the vehicle. RIf you have bought a used vehicle, it is possible that the previous owner still has access to the online access to the vehicle. Calling up functions The online access to the vehicle allows you access to your vehicle's information and functions using remote query and remote configuration. The following functions can be accessed: Rrequest the current condition of charge of the high-voltage battery Rprogram the departure time (Y page 249) Rset or activate the "Pre-entry climate control at departure time" function (see the Digital Operator's Manual) Information on additional functions and operating instructions can be found within the online access to the vehicle. Connecting the vehicle to the Internet i This function is not available in all countries and requires activated access to the mbrace emergency call system. You can use the online access to the vehicle if the vehicle has a connection to the Internet via a mobile phone network. The necessary data is transmitted by radio. The vehicle automatically recognizes whether a connection to the Internet is possible or not. No presets are necessary. i Restrictions in reception are possible if the vehicle is in an underground car park, for example. Restrictions may also occur in areas with poor mobile network coverage. Parking Important safety notes G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable materials come into contact with parts of the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not to park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be damaged. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. Rthe front wheels must be turned towards the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients. Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at the front axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at the rear axle with a wheel chock or similar, for example, on uphill or downhill gradients. Switching off the engine Important safety notes G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. Vehicles with automatic transmission Apply the electric parking brake. Shift the transmission to position P. X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. The immobilizer is activated. X With the Start/Stop button: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 146). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. When the driver's door is closed, this corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When the driver's door is open, this corresponds to SmartKey position 0: "SmartKey removed". X X If you switch the engine off with the transmission in position R or D, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. With the SmartKey: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey from the ignition, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. With the Start/Stop button: if you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door, the automatic transmission shifts to P automatically. If you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system: X Vehicles with the Start-Stop button: remove the Start-Stop button from the ignition lock. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X All vehicles: switch the ignition on. Z Driving and parking Parking 177 Parking 178 Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. The engine can be switched off in an emergency while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button for three seconds. This function operates independently of the ECO start/stop automatic engine switch-off function. Driving and parking X Electric parking brake General notes switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. Applying or releasing manually X G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rrelease the parking brake. the automatic transmission out of the parking position P. Rstart the engine. In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rshift The function of the electric parking brake is dependent on the on-board voltage. If the onboard voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system, it may not be possible to apply the released parking brake. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on level ground and secure it to prevent it rolling away. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. It may not be possible to release an applied parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunction in the system. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the engine is To apply: push handle :. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. The electric parking brake can also be applied when the SmartKey is removed. To release: pull handle :. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake can only be released: Rwhen the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146) or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Start/Stop button X Applying automatically The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the transmission is in position P and: Rthe engine is switched off or Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened. To prevent the electric parking brake from being automatically applied, pull handle :. Driving tips Releasing automatically Your vehicle's electric parking brake is automatically released if all of the following conditions are met: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position D or R. Rthe seat belt has been fastened. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following conditions must be fulfilled to automatically release the electric parking brake: Rthe driver's door is closed. Ryou have shifted out of transmission position P or you have previously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. Emergency braking The vehicle can also be braked during an emergency by using the electric parking brake. X While driving, push handle : of the electric parking brake (Y page 178). The vehicle is braked as long as you keep handle : of the electric parking brake depressed. The longer electric parking brake handle : is depressed, the greater the braking force. During braking: Ra warning tone sounds Rthe Please Release Parking Brake message appears Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than four weeks, the battery may be damaged by exhaustive discharging. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. i You can obtain information about trickle chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: observe the important safety notes for the high-voltage battery (Y page 349). Driving tips General driving tips Important safety notes G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, Z Driving and parking The electric parking brake is also engaged automatically if: RDISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rthe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver is not wearing a seat belt and the driver's door is opened Rthere is a system malfunction Rthe power supply is insufficient Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The electric parking brake is not automatically engaged if the engine is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. 179 180 Driving tips for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Driving and parking G WARNING If you operate mobile communication equipment while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle is stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per second. Drive sensibly – save fuel Observe the following tips to save fuel: X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Remove unnecessary loads. X Remove roof racks when they are not needed. X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. X Have all maintenance work carried out as indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service interval display. Fuel consumption also increases when driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain. Drinking and driving G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident is greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Emission control G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Certain engine systems are designed to keep the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Always have work on the engine carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an authorized MercedesBenz Center for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. The engine settings must not be changed under any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific service work must be carried out at regular intervals and in accordance with the MercedesBenz service requirements. Details can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. ECO display The ECO display shows you how economical your driving style is. The ECO display assists you in achieving the most economical driving style Driving tips for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. Your driving style can significantly influence the vehicle's consumption. 181 The ECO display consists of three sections, with an inner and outer area. The sections correspond to the following three categories: : Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration processes): area lights up green: moderate acceleration, especially at higher speeds Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: sporty acceleration ; : ; = ? Acceleration Coasting Constant Additional range achieved Range ? is shown under Bonus fr. Start and represents the additional range achieved since the beginning of the journey as a result of an adapted driving style. If the fuel level has dropped into the reserve range, the Reserve Fuel display message is shown instead of range ? in the multifunction display. The 8 warning lamp in the instrument cluster also lights up (Y page 293). Coasting (evaluation of all deceleration processes): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: anticipatory driving, keeping your distance and early release of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast without use of the brakes. Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: frequent heavy braking = Constant (continuous evaluation over the entire journey): Rthe outer area fills up and the inner area lights up green: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rthe outer area empties and the inner area is gray: fluctuations in speed The three inner areas display the current driving style and light up green as a result of a particularly economical driving style. Depending on the driving situation, up to two areas may light up simultaneously. At the beginning of the journey, the three outer areas are empty and fill up as a result of economical driving. A higher level indicates a more economical driving style. If the three outer areas are completely filled at the same time, the driver has adopted the most economical driving style for the selected settings and prevailing conditions. The ECO display border lights up. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. The additionally achieved range displayed under Bonus fr. Start does not indicate a fixed consumption reduction. Z Driving and parking Rthe outer area fills up and the inner Driving and parking 182 Driving tips In addition to driving style, the actual consumption is affected by other factors, such as: Rload Rtire pressure Rcold start Rchoice of route Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO display. An economical driving style specially requires driving at moderate engine speeds. Achieving a higher value in the categories "Acceleration" and "Constant": Robserve the gearshift recommendations. Rdrive in drive program E. On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the outer area for "constant" will change. The ECO display summarizes the driving style from the start of the journey to its completion. Therefore, there are more marked changes in the outer areas at the start of a journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer changes. For more marked changes, perform a manual rest (Y page 241). For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 240). Braking Important safety notes G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Downhill gradients ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting early to a lower gear. This allows you to take advantage of the engine braking effect and helps avoid overheating and excessive wear of the brakes. When you take advantage of the engine braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g. on a slippery road surface. This could cause damage to the drive train. This type of damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Heavy and light loads G WARNING If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, the braking system can overheat. This increases the stopping distance and can even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. Wet roads If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain without braking, there may be a delayed reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. You have to depress the brake pedal more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying attention to the traffic conditions. This will warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly and protecting them against corrosion. Limited braking performance on salttreated roads If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt residue may form on the brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly longer braking distance. RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions. RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the beginning and end of a journey. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ahead. Servicing the brakes ! The brake fluid level may be too low, if: Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and Ryou hear a warning tone while the engine is running Observe additional warning messages in the multifunction display. The brake fluid level may be too low due to brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Have the brake system checked immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. ! A function or performance test should only be carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified specialist workshop in advance. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. ! The ESP® system operates automatically. The engine and the ignition must therefore be switched off (the SmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/ Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if the electric parking brake is tested on a brake dynamometer. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® may cause severe damage to the brake system. All checks and maintenance work on the brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Have brake pads installed and brake fluid replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. If the brake system has only been subject to moderate loads, you should test the functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 68) and BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) (Y page 69). For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends only installing the following brake disks and brake pads/linings: Rbrake disks that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz Rbrake pads/linings that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalent standard of quality Other brake disks or brake pads/linings can compromise the safety of your vehicle. Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/ linings on an axle at the same time. Always install new brake pads/linings when replacing brake disks. The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brake disks to which the wheel assembly with rim and threaded connection is matched. The use of brake disks other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can change the track width and is subject to approval, if applicable. Shock-type loads when handling the brake disks, such as when changing wheels, can lead to a reduction in comfort when driving with lightweight brake disks. Avoid shock-type loads on the lightweight brake disks, particularly on the brake plate. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brake fluid which has not been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could affect your vehicle's operating safety. High-performance and ceramic brakes (Mercedes AMG vehicles) The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: RSpeed RBraking force REnvironmental conditions, such as temperature and humidity The wear of individual components of the brake system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake discs, depends on the individual driving style and operating conditions. For this reason, it is impossible to state a mileage that will be valid under all circumstances. An Z 183 Driving and parking Driving tips Driving and parking 184 Driving tips aggressive driving style will lead to high wear. You can obtain more information on this from a qualified specialist workshop. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Excessive heavy braking results in correspondingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note any brake status messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain and have the brake system checked regularly. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following manner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbrake carefully. Driving on flooded roads ! Bear in mind that vehicles traveling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum permissible water depth to be exceeded. Failure to observe these notes may result in damage to the engine, electrical systems and transmission. If you have to drive on stretches of road on which water has collected, please bear in mind that: Rin the case of standing water, the water level may be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body Ryou should drive no faster than at a walking pace Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a window on the side of the vehicle that is not facing into the wind. Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Drive particularly carefully on slippery road surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be stopped when moving at low speed: X Shift the transmission to position N. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing weather conditions. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. For more information on driving with snow chains, see (Y page 363). For more information on driving with summer tires, see (Y page 362). Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" section (Y page 362). Driving systems Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for innovative driver assistance and safety systems which enhance comfort and support the driver in critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a milestone on the path towards autonomous driving. Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all elements of active and passive safety in one well thought out system – for the safety of the vehicle occupants and that of other road users. Further information on driving safety systems (Y page 67). vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. i The speed indicated in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed stored. Cruise control lever Cruise control General notes Cruise control maintains a constant road speed for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid exceeding the set speed. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic conditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the Activates or increases speed Activates or reduces speed Deactivates cruise control Activates at the current speed/last stored speed When you activate cruise control, the stored speed is shown in the multifunction display for five seconds. In addition, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. Speedometer with segments: when cruise control is activated, the segments from the stored speed to the maximum permitted speed light up. : ; = ? Storing and maintaining the current speed You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). Z 185 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 186 Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle automatically maintains the stored speed. X X Driving and parking i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing the current speed or calling up the last stored speed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it is lower than the current speed, the vehicle decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Setting a speed Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to the speed set. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Deactivating cruise control There are several ways to deactivate cruise control: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards =. or X Brake. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h) RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Ryou shift the transmission to position N while driving If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ trol Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i When you switch off the engine, the last speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS General notes DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected with the aid of the radar sensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. Driving systems i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: Rpeople or animals Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- ped or parked vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Roncoming G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then brake the vehicle Rneither give a warning nor intervene Raccelerate or brake unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by DISTRONIC PLUS. G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration. If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and try to take evasive action. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Z Driving and parking Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. This is especially important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. 187 Driving and parking 188 Driving systems If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehicles driving on a different line. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is snow or heavy rain Rthere is interference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example, in parking garages If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane or an exit lane Rbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehicles driving on the left (left-hand drive countries) Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehicles driving on the right (right-hand drive countries) If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Cruise control lever To activate or increase speed To activate or reduce speed To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS To activate at the current speed/last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance : ; = ? Activating DISTRONIC PLUS Activation conditions In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Rthe engine must be started. It may take up to two minutes after pulling away before DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be released. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. RActive Parking Assist must not be activated. Rthe transmission must be in position D. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you shift from P to D or your seat belt must be fastened. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors must be closed. Switching on Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. X i If you do not fully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Suspended message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator pedal. You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?, up : or down ;. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In this way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. Activating at the current speed/last stored speed Selecting the drive program G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS Pulling away and driving If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ?. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a different line from another vehicle. The vehicle then brakes automatically. X DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style when you have selected the S or S+ driving program (Y page 159). Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If you have selected the C or E driving program, the vehicle accelerates more gently. This setting is recommended in stopand-start traffic. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h) Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehicles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehicles. Stopping G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Z 189 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 190 Driving and parking Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle against rolling away. For further information on deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 191). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is stationary. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. i Depending on the specified minimum dis- tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in front. The specified minimum distance is set using the control on the cruise control lever. When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if DISTRONIC PLUS is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, the transmission may also shift into position P automatically. the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Setting a specified minimum distance You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 191). i Make sure that you maintain the minimum distance to the vehicle in front as required by law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Rthe Setting a speed Press the cruise control lever up : for a higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press X To increase: turn control ; in direction =. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control ; in direction :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X Driving systems DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster 191 Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated : DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears when the cruise control lever is actuated) If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments between the speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed ; light up. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Plus package: the segments likewise light up if a vehicle in front is detected in the fast lane. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated ; Vehicle in front, if detected = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the onboard computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 246). You will see the stored speed for about five seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 247) of the onboard computer, you can select the assistance graphics display. X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 246). There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the Z Driving and parking Displays in the speedometer 192 Driving systems multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. Driving and parking i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Rthe vehicle is skidding Ryou activate Active Parking Assist If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot General notes Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: the ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles which are not driving in the middle of their lane. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect the vehicle in front on the edge of the road because of its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. RObstacles and stationary vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in the center of the driving lane by means of moderate steering interventions at speeds of 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h). It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera :, at the top of the windshield. In a speed range from 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into account lane markings, e.g. when following vehicles in a traffic jam. At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h), Steering Assist focuses on clear lane markings (left and right), only focusing on the vehicle in front if clear lane markings are not present. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not provide any support if these conditions do not exist. DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the function to be available. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor Driving systems The system is switched to passive and no longer assists you by performing steering interventions if: Ryou actively change lane Ryou switch on the turn signal Rtake your hands off the steering wheel or do not steer for a prolonged period of time i Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti- vated again automatically after a lane change is completed. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot do not provide any support: Ron very sharp corners Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed Pay attention also to the important safety notes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187). The steering interventions are carried out with a limited steering moment. The system requires the driver to keep his hands on the steering wheel and to steer himself. If you do not steer yourself or if you take your hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged period of time, the system will first alert you with a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol appears in the multifunction display. If you have still not started to steer and have not taken hold of the steering wheel after five seconds at the latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUS remains active. Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The DTR+: Steering Assist. On message appears in Z Driving and parking override the laws of physics. It cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is driving towards the edge of the road, your vehicle could come into contact with the curb or other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly next to your vehicle. Obstacles such as traffic pylons on the lane or projecting out into the lane are not detected. An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle yourself to ensure that it does not leave the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road 193 Driving systems 194 the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated. Information in the multifunction display Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Driving and parking Rthere If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activated but is not ready for a steering intervention, steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the system provides you with support by means of steering interventions, symbol : is shown in green. Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot Press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The DTR+: Steering Assist. Off message appears in the multifunction display. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deactivated automatically. X HOLD function General notes The HOLD function can assist the driver in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes Rwhen waiting in traffic The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected There is a risk of an accident. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle against rolling away. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 195). Activation conditions You can activate the HOLD function if all of the following conditions are fulfilled: Rthe vehicle is stationary. Rthe engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt is fastened. Rthe electric parking brake is released. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N. RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Driving systems The electric parking brake secures the vehicle automatically if the HOLD function is activated when the vehicle is stationary and: Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. If a malfunction occurs, then the transmission may be shifted into position P automatically. RACE START Important safety notes Make sure that the activation conditions are met. X Depress the brake pedal. X Quickly depress the brake pedal further until : appears in the multifunction display. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. X i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function is deactivated automatically if: Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R. Rthe transmission is in position P. Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until : disappears from the multifunction display. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric parking brake. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. When the HOLD function is activated, the transmission is shifted automatically to position P if: Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and the driver's door is open. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. i RACE START must not be used on normal roads. RACE START must only be activated and used on dedicated road circuits, outside of public road use. i RACE START is only available in Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal acceleration from a standing start. For this, a suitably high-grip road surface is required, along with the tires and vehicle being in proper operating condition. G WARNING If you use RACE START, individual tires may start to spin and the vehicle could skid. Depending on the selected ESP® mode, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons, animals or obstacles are within range of the vehicle. i Observe the safety notes on driving safety systems (Y page 68). Be sure to read the safety notes and information on ESP® (Y page 73). Conditions for activation You can activate RACE START if: Rthe doors are closed. Rthe engine is running and it has reached an operating temperature of approximately 160 ‡ (71 †). This is the case when the oil temperature gauge in the multifunction display is shown in white. Rthe drive program S, S+ or Race is selected. (Y page 154) Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. Z Driving and parking Activating the HOLD function 195 196 Driving systems Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is depressed (left foot). Rthe transmission is in position D. Activating RACE START Driving and parking i When manual mode (Y page 161) is active, the transmission automatically shifts up to RACE START in the drive program. This function supports maximum acceleration with RACE START. After going through an accelerating process once from a stationary position, this function is automatically deactivated. X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot and keep it depressed. X Pull and hold both steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 161). The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in the multifunction display. X Release both steering wheel paddle shifters (Y page 161). i If the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 161). or X To confirm: pull the right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 161). The RACE START Available Depress gas pedal. message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not depress the accelerator pedal fully within two seconds, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Not Possible See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display. X Fully depress the accelerator pedal. The engine speed rises to approximately 3,500 rpm. The RACE START Release brake to start message appears in the multifunction display. i If you do not release the brake pedal within five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START Active message appears in the multifunction display. RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h). RACE START is deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐ sible See Operator's Manual or RACE START Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. i If RACE START is used repeatedly within a short period of time, it is only available again after the vehicle has been driven a certain distance. AIRMATIC General notes AIRMATIC is an air suspension with variable damping for improved driving comfort. All-round level control ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption. There is also the option to manually adjust the vehicle level. AIRMATIC consists of level setting, level control and the Adaptive Damping System ADS. Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Driving systems i If one of the doors is open, the vehicle is not Suspension settings Vehicle level The Adaptive Damping System automatically controls the calibration of the dampers. The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection, i.e. sports or comfort Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Setting the raised vehicle level General notes Sports tuning It is possible to choose between the "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels below a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Select the "Normal" setting for normal road surfaces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your selection remains stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. The Vehicle Rising message appears in the multifunction display. i The message disappears after ten seconds, irrespective of the level reached. If necessary, the vehicle is raised further. The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you: Rdrive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Rdrive for approximately three minutes at a speed over 50 mph (80 km/h). The "Raised level" remains active when you are not driving within these speed ranges. X Setting the normal vehicle level X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit: X In the "Sport" and "Sport Plus" drive programs, the firmer suspension setting ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level. Comfort tuning In the "Economy" and "Comfort" drive programs, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfort mode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of highway. X The vehicle is raised to the normal level. When driving at speeds above 80 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is automatically lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) in the E and C drive programs. When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) the vehicle is raised again. AMG adaptive sport suspension system General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously. This improves driving safety and ride comfort. Press button :. Z Driving and parking lowered. 197 Driving and parking 198 Driving systems The damping is tuned individually to each wheel and depends on: Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty Rthe road surface condition, e.g. bumps Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + or Comfort The suspension setting is adjusted using the corresponding button in the center console. Sport + mode The very firm setting of the suspension setting in Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact with the road. Select this mode only when driving on race circuits. If indicator lamps ; and = are off: X i The mode can also be set using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (Y page 154). This is only possible if: Rusing the AMG adaptive sport suspension system button on the center console, and Rusing the DYNAMIC SELECT switch, the same mode is selected for the chassis. This is the case, for example, when both are set to Comfort mode. Each time you start the engine with the ignition key or the Start/Stop button, Comfort mode is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 148). Sport mode Press button : twice. Indicator lamps ; and = light up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display . If indicator lamp = lights up: X Press button : once. Second indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport + mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT + message appears in the multifunction display . Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style, but also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. highways. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps ; and = go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Suspension System COMFORT message appears in the multifunction display. 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in Sport mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. You have selected Sport mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT message appears in the multifunction display . 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are permanently driven. Together with ESP®, it improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip: ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. RAccelerate less when driving. Driving systems This may damage the transfer case. Damage of this sort is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty. All wheels must remain either on the ground or be fully raised. Observe the instructions for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full contact with the ground. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Range of the sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, animals or objects. Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. PARKTRONIC Important safety notes PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects when they are in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Z Driving and parking ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. 199 200 Driving systems Driving and parking The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 339). Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) area is located on the headliner in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if operational readiness indicator = lights up. The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Transmission posi- Warning display tion Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm) If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. Warning displays : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi- cle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi- cle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is in the instrument cluster. The warning display for the rear D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle is Rear and front areas activated rolling backwards P No areas activated One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance. Driving systems 201 d e : ; Driving and parking Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Switch on the dashboard Switch in the center console Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC Indicator lamp If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Z 202 Driving systems Problems with PARKTRONIC Driving and parking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments in PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. the PARKTRONIC warn- X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified speing displays are lit. You cialist workshop. also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated and the indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Only the red segments in The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. the PARKTRONIC warn- X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 339). ing displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is then deactivated. The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location. Active Parking Assist General notes Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid with ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates a suitable parking space. Active steering intervention and brake application can assist you during parking and when exiting a parking space. You may also use PARKTRONIC (Y page 199). Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the maneuvering range. When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. G WARNING While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users. Stop the vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta- cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Active Parking Assist may also display spaces not suitable for parking, e.g.: Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the parking space as possible. RParking spaces that are littered or overgrown might be identified or measured incorrectly. RParking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (Y page 200) warning messages during the parking procedure. can intervene in the steering procedure to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist will then be canceled. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has a direct influence on the parking characteristics of the vehicle. Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the pavement RYou Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rtwo parking spaces are located directly next to one another Rthe parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb Ryou park forwards Active Parking Assist does not assist you parking in spaces that are parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel if: Rthe parking space is on a curb Rthe system reads the parking space as being blocked, for example by foliage or grass paving blocks Rthe area is too small for the vehicle to maneuver into Rthe parking space is bordered by an obstacle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer Detecting parking spaces Objects located above the height range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods vehicles. G WARNING If there are objects above the detection range: RActive Park Assist may steer too early Rthe vehicle may not stop in front of these objects You may cause a collision as a result. There is a risk of an accident. If objects are located above the detection range, stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. For further information on the detection range (Y page 199). : Detected parking space on the left ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right Active Parking Assist is switched on automatically when driving forwards. The system is operational at speeds of up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the system independently locates and measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist will only detect parking spaces: Rparallel or at right angles to the direction of travel Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide Z 203 Driving and parking Driving systems 204 Driving systems Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehicle Rthat are at right angles to the direction of travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than your vehicle Driving and parking i Note that Active Parking Assist cannot measure the size of a parking space if it is at right angles to the direction of travel. You will need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into the parking space. When driving at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a status indicator in the instrument cluster. When a parking space has been detected, an arrow towards the right or the left also appears. By default, Active Parking Assist only displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is activated. When parking on the driver's side, this must remain switched on until you acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The system automatically determines whether the parking space is parallel or at right angles to the direction of travel. A parking space is displayed while you are driving past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking G WARNING If you leave the vehicle when it is only being braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident. Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it against rolling away. i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically during the parking process. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Shift the transmission to position R. The Start Park Assist?Yes: OKNo:% message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To park using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. X X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all times. When backing up, drive at a speed below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the rear border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. The Park Assist Active Select D Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all times. Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a standstill when the vehicle approaches the front border of the parking space. Maneuvering may be required in tight parking spaces. Driving systems Exiting a parking space In order that Active Parking Assist can support you when you exit the parking space: Rthe border of the parking space must be high enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too small, for example. Rthe border of the parking space must not be too wide, as the position of the vehicle must not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting position as it is maneuvering into the parking space. Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft (1.0 m) must be available. Active Parking Assist can only assist you with exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using Active Parking Assist. i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the vehicle exits the parking space. You are responsible for braking in good time. X Start the engine. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the turn signal in the direction you are pulling away. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:% message appears in the multifunction display. X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering wheel or pull away. or X To exit a parking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunction steering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed a maximum speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled. X Depending on the message or as required, shift the transmission to position D or R. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in the other direction. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings message appears in the multifunction display. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to complete before pulling away. If you back up after activation, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. X Drive forwards and back up as prompted by the PARKTRONIC warning displays, several times if necessary. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheel is moved to the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the Park Assist Switched Off message appears in the multifunction display. You will then have to steer and merge into traffic on your own. Z Driving and parking The Park Assist Active Select R Observe Surroundingsmessage appears in the multifunction display. As soon as the parking procedure is complete, the Park Assist Switched Off message appears and a warning tone sounds. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled when you depress the accelerator pedal. Active Parking Assist no longer supports you with steering interventions and brake applications. When Active Parking Assist is finished, you must steer and brake again yourself. PARKTRONIC is still available. Parking tips: RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the parking space after parking is dependent on various factors. These include the position and shape of the vehicles parked in front and behind it and the conditions of the location. It may be the case that Active Parking Assist guides you too far into a parking space, or not far enough into it. In some cases, it may also lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary, you should cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. RYou can also select preselect transmission position D. The vehicle redirects and does not drive as far into the parking space. Should the transmission change take place too early, the parking procedure will be canceled. A sensible parking position can no longer be achieved from this position. 205 Driving systems 206 PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over the steering, before the vehicle has exited the parking space completely. This is useful, for example when you recognize that it is already possible to pull out of the parking space. Rear view camera General notes Driving and parking Canceling Active Parking Assist X or Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Press the PARKTRONIC button (Y page 201). PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Parking Assist is immediately canceled. The Park Assist Canceled message appears in the multifunction display. Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically if: Rthe electric parking brake is engaged Rtransmission position P is selected Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no longer possible Ryou are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. The ÷ warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol disappears and the multifunction display shows the Park Assist Canceled message. When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer and brake again yourself. If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the accelerator again. X Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia system. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. i The text shown in the multimedia system depends on the language setting. The following are examples of rear view camera displays in the multimedia system. Important safety notes The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Under the following circumstances, the rear view camera will not function, or will function in a limited manner: Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter Driving systems the camera lens is dirty or obstructed Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 339) Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack). i The rear view camera is protected from rain- ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. drops and dust by means of a flap. When the rear view camera is activated, this flap opens. The flap closes again when: Ryou have finished the maneuvering process Ryou switch off the engine Ryou open the trunk Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 339). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the rear view camera has been deactivated. Activating/deactivating the rear view camera To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). X Engage reverse gear. The rear view camera flap opens. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle with guide lines. The image from the rear view camera is available throughout the maneuvering process. To deactivate: the rear view camera deactivates if you shift the transmission to P or after driving forwards a short distance. X : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Multimedia display The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The rear view camera does not show objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) Z Driving and parking Rif 207 208 Driving systems C Bumper D Red guide line at a distance of approximately Driving and parking 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. "Reverse parking" function Backing up straight into a parking space without turning the steering wheel : White guide line without turning the steering : Front warning display ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement operational readiness indicator = Rear warning display Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), an additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMAND display ;. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display. wheel, vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (static) ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 207). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check whether the vehicle will fit into the parking space. X Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully back up until you reach the end position. Red guide line ? is then at the end of the parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. Driving systems 209 : White guide line at current steering wheel angle : Parking space marking ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Drive past the parking space and bring the vehicle to a standstill. X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 207). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until yellow guide line ; reaches parking space marking :. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully. ; Parking space marking X Turn the steering wheel to the center position while the vehicle is stationary. : Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space X Back up carefully until you have reached the final position. Red guide line : is then at end of parking space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the parking space. : Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible. Z Driving and parking Reverse perpendicular parking with the steering wheel at an angle 210 Driving systems Driving and parking "Wide-angle" function : Symbol for the wide-angle view function ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays You can also use the rear view camera to select a wide-angle view. When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 200), a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the display of the multimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warning displays = light up in the multimedia system display in yellow or red respectively. Object detection The rear view camera helps detect moving and stationary objects. If an object (person, vehicle or other obstacle) is detected, this object is marked with a bar. Objects located some distance from the vehicle away are marked with a yellow bar. If the distance to the object is very small, the bar is displayed in red. Object detection only works in wide-angle view. To ensure that you can use the function, it must be switched on in the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). 360° camera General notes The 360° camera is a system consisting of four cameras. The system processes images from the following cameras: RRear view camera RFront camera RTwo side cameras in the exterior mirrors The cameras capture the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The system supports you, for example when parking or if vision is restricted at an exit. You can show images from the 360° camera in full-screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the multimedia system. A split-screen view also includes a top view of the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data supplied by the installed cameras (virtual camera). The six split-screen views are: Rtop view and picture from the rear view camera (130° viewing angle) Rtop view and image from the front camera (130° viewing angle without displaying the maximum steering wheel angle) Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rtop view and enlarged front view Rtop view and images from the rear-facing side cameras (rear wheel view) Rtop view and images from the forward-facing side cameras (front wheel view) When the function is active and you shift the transmission from D or R to N, the guide lines are hidden in the multimedia system. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also be optically displayed: Rin split screen view as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon in the top view, or Rat the bottom right as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode The line thickness and color of the brackets show how far the vehicle is from an object. Ryellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC is active Ryellow brackets with normal lines: an object is present in close range of the vehicle Rred line: an object is present in the immediate close range of the vehicle Important safety notes The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a substitute for attentive driving. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, Driving systems Activation conditions The 360° camera image can be displayed if: Rthe multimedia system is switched on Rthe 360° Camera function is switched on i If you are driving faster than at a moderate speed and you turn on the 360° camera, a warning message appears. The warning message disappears if: Ryou are again driving at a moderate speed The 360° camera is then activated. Rthe message is confirmed with the % button. Switching the 360° camera on and off using the button To switch on: press button :. Depending on whether position D or R is engaged, the following is shown: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera X To switch off: press button :. X Activating the 360° camera using reverse gear The 360° camera images can be automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. Z Driving and parking make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. You are always responsible for safety, and must always pay attention to your surroundings when parking and maneuvering. This applies to the areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. The 360° camera will not function or will function in a limited manner: Rif the doors are open Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in Rif the trunk lid is open Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rat night or in very dark places Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright light Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED lighting (the display may flicker) Rif the camera lenses fog up, e.g. when driving into a heated garage in winter, causing a rapid change in temperature Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered Rif the vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the camera position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You can otherwise injure others or cause damage to objects or the vehicle. The guide lines in the COMAND display show the distances to your vehicle. The distances only apply to road level. The camera in the rear area is protected by means of a flap. This flap opens when the 360° camera is activated. Observe the notes on cleaning (Y page 339). For technical reasons, the flap may remain open briefly after the 360° camera has been deactivated. On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis, depending on technical conditions, leaving the standard height can result in: Rinaccuracies in the guide lines Rinaccuracies in the display of generated images (top view) 211 Driving systems 212 Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that the Activation by R gear function is selected in the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). X To show the 360° camera image: engage reverse gear. The multimedia system shows the area behind the vehicle in split-screen mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and the image from the rear view camera. Driving and parking X Rthe rear section of an HGV slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottommost guideline. Ra Top view with picture from the rear view camera Selecting the split-screen view or full screen mode Switching between split screen views: X To switch to the line with the vehicle icons: slide 5 the controller. X To select a vehicle icon: turn the controller. Switching to full screen mode: X : Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- 180° View Turn and press the controller. i The full screen option is only available in the following views: RTop view with picture from the rear view camera RTop view with picture from the front camera Multimedia display ; = ? A imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image Guide line for the maximum steering angle Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Important safety notes The camera system may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all. Obstacles are not shown by the system in the following locations: Runder the front and rear bumpers Rvery close to the front and rear bumpers Rin close range above the handle on the trunk lid Rvery close to the exterior mirrors Rin the transitional areas between the various cameras in the virtual top view ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx- imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper E Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle The guide lines are shown when the transmission is in position R. Driving systems The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. i This setting can also be selected as an Top view with picture from the front camera Top view with image from the side cameras : Symbol for the split screen setting with top : Symbol for the top view and forward-facing ; ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = ? A B enlarged front view. side camera setting including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors (left side of vehicle) i You can also select the side camera setting for the rear-facing view. 180° view Top view and enlarged rear view : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rear view camera image enlarged ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the distance to the vehicle behind you. ; Own vehicle = PARKTRONIC warning displays i 180° view can also be selected as front view. Select this view when you are driving out of an exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted, for example. Z Driving and parking view and front camera image Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of the vehicle Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of the vehicle 213 214 Driving systems i If you select the % symbol in the display and confirm with the controller, the splitscreen view appears. Exiting 360° camera display mode Driving and parking The 360° camera display is stopped Rwhen you select transmission position P, or you are driving at moderate speeds The view which was active before the 360° camera was displayed appears in the Audio 20 or COMAND display. You can also stop the 360° camera display split-screen view by selecting the % symbol in the display and then confirming with the COMAND controller. Rwhen Rif the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when you change lanes or change your speed The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness assessment is deleted and restarted when continuing the journey, if: Ryou switch off the engine Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break Displaying the attention level ATTENTION ASSIST General notes ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is restricted and warnings may be delayed or not occur at all: Rif the length of the journey is less than approximately 30 minutes Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph (200 km/h) Rif you are driving with the active Steer Assist of DISTRONIC PLUS You can have current status information displayed in the assistance menu (Y page 247) of the on-board computer. X Select the Assistance display for Attention Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 246). The following information is displayed: Rlength of the journey since the last break. Rthe attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST (Attention Level), displayed in a bar display in five levels from high to low. RIf ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. The bar display then changes the display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph (200 km/h). Activating ATTENTION ASSIST X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the onboard computer (Y page 248). The system determines the attention level of the driver depending on the setting selected: Selection Standard: the sensitivity with which the system determines the attention level is set to normal. Selection Sensitive: the sensitivity is set higher. The attention level detected by Attention Assist is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned earlier. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the multifunction display in the assistance graphic display. When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated, it is automatically reactivated after the engine has been stopped. The sensitivity selected corresponds to the last selection activated (standard/sensitive). Warning in the multifunction display If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration are detected, a warning appears in the multifunction display: ATTENTION ASSIST Take a Break!. In addition to the message shown in the multifunction display, you will then hear a warning tone. X If necessary, take a break. X Confirm the message by pressing the a button on the steering wheel. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST still detects increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration. If a warning is output in the multifunction display, a service station search is performed in COMAND. You can select a service station and navigation to this service station will then begin. This function can be activated and deactivated in COMAND. Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system, and for this reason, traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near roadworks) are not detected. If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the display of the speed limits is updated. Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also shown. The traffic signs are only displayed with the restrictions if: Rthe regulation must be observed with the restriction, or RTraffic Sign Assist is unable to determine whether the restriction applies If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a maximum permitted speed from any of the available sources, no speed limit is displayed in the instrument cluster either. Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the assistance graphic display (Y page 246). Important safety notes Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign Assist display. The system may be either functionally impaired or temporarily unavailable if the information in the digital street map of the navigation system is incorrect or out of date. General notes Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster. The data and general traffic regulations stored in the navigation system are used to determine the current speed limit. Z 215 Driving and parking Driving systems Driving systems 216 Instrument cluster display Displaying the assistance graphic General notes Call up the assistance graphics display function using the on-board computer (Y page 246). X Select the Traffic Sign Assist display. Detected traffic signs are displayed in the instrument cluster. Blind Spot Assist monitors the areas on either side of the vehicle that are not visible to the driver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). X Driving and parking Blind Spot Assist Speed limit with unknown restriction Important safety notes G WARNING Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles : Maximum permitted speed ; Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for which the restriction in the additional sign is relevant = Additional sign for unknown restriction A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph (80 km/h) and a speed limit of 60 km/h (60 mph) with an unknown restriction apply. i The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph) depends on the country in which you are driving. It is generally neither shown on the traffic sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be taken into account when observing the maximum permitted speed. Lane Tracking package General notes The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind Spot Assist (Y page 216) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 218). overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other road users and obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are integrated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The sensors must not be covered, for example by Driving systems Monitoring area In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, snow or spray Rthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or bicycles Rthe road has very wide lanes Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an extended period next to long vehicles, such as trucks. Warning display Driving and parking cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly. : Warning display Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If you select the reverse gear, Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles driving at the inner edge of their lanes. 217 Collision warning If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corresponding turn signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Z Driving systems 218 Switching on Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Blind Spot Assist (Y page 248) is activated in the on-board computer. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red until the engine is started. Driving and parking X Display in the assistance graphic This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rnot When Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green :. Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Lane Keeping Assist General notes Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : which is attached behind the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. You should always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Driving systems for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist To activate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐ ing Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, there may be a warning. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 246) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. X Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Adaptive When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Driving Assistance PLUS package General notes The Driving Assistance PLUS package consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186), Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 219) and Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 222). Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting Active Blind Spot Assist In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 248). X Select Standard or Adaptive. Standard When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle, to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle which the driver is unable to see. A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If X General notes Z Driving and parking Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings 219 Driving and parking 220 Driving systems you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lane, you will also receive an optical and audible warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist evaluates the space in the direction of travel and at the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sensors. Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Important safety notes Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles which approach with a large speed differential and overtake your vehicle As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Radar sensors The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are integrated into the front and rear bumpers and behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors must not be covered, e.g. by bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the function of the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Monitoring area G WARNING Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all traffic situations and road users. There is a risk of an accident. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles. i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way. Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Driving systems Warning display If you select the reverse gear, Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational. The brightness of the warning lamps is automatically adapted to the brightness of the surroundings. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), the color of the radar waves in the assistance display changes to green ;. Active Blind Spot Assist is then ready for use. Visual and acoustic collision warning If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision warning. You will then hear a double warning tone and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no further warning tones. Course-correcting brake application : Warning display Active Blind Spot Assist is not operational at speeds below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a coursecorrecting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision. G WARNING A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. Z Driving and parking The detection of obstacles can be impaired in the case of: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated. Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or may only detect them too late. If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner edge of your lane. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar solid lane borders. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. trucks, for a prolonged time. 221 Driving systems Driving and parking 222 If a course-correcting brake application occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mirror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition, display ; underlining the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. A course-correcting brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between 20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to the driving situation occurs if: Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle. Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the side. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 248). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds. Gray radar waves propagating backwards appear next to the vehicle in the assistance display in the multifunction display. X Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of multifunction camera : at the top of the windshield. Various different areas to the front, rear and side of your vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the road and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a lane-correcting application of the brakes can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of road and weather conditions. It may not recognize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. The system may be impaired or may not function if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain, fog or spray Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface is wet) Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Rthe radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by snow Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Rthe road is narrow and winding Rthere are strong shadows cast on the road If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and broken lane markings are detected, no lane-correcting brake application is made. Warning vibration in the steering wheel A warning may be given if a front wheel passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Lane-correcting brake application If you leave your lane, under certain circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly on one side. This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. G WARNING A lane-correcting brake application cannot always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns you or makes a lane-correcting brake application. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, display : appears in the multifunction display. The brake application also slightly reduces vehicle speed. This function is available in the range between 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h). A lane-correcting brake application can be made after driving over a lane marking detected as being solid or broken. Before this, a warning must be given by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. In the case of a broken lane marking being detected, a lane-correcting brake application can only be made if a vehicle has been detected in the adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be detected. i A further lane-correcting brake application can only occur after your vehicle has returned to the original lane. No lane-correcting brake application occurs if: Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Z 223 Driving and parking Driving systems PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 224 Driving and parking Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. RESP® is switched off. Rthe transmission is not in position D. Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. Ran obstacle in the lane in which you are driving has been detected. Active Lane Keeping Assist may not detect other road users or traffic situations. An inappropriate brake application may be interrupted at any time if you: Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction Rswitch on the turn signal Rclearly brake or accelerate A lane-correcting brake application is interrupted automatically if: Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist To activate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up. The Lane Keep‐ ing Assist On message appears in the multifunction display. If all conditions have been satisfied, a warning or steering intervention may be made. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, the lines in the assistance graphics display (Y page 246) are shown in green. Active Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. X To deactivate: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. The Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The Lane X Keeping Assist Off message appears in the multifunction display. Selecting Standard or Adaptive setting In the DriveAssist menu on the on-board computer, select the Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist function (Y page 248). X Select Standard or Adaptive. When Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration occurs if: Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS, BAS or ESP®. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard. Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. X PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation Points to remember General notes Hybrid technology combines a fuel efficient internal combustion engine with a powerful electric motor. In HYBRID mode, the hybrid drive system automatically selects the most efficient operating mode for every driving situation. Drive the vehicle in the usual manner. To save fuel in HYBRID mode, the hybrid drive system switches off the combustion engine as often as possible during the journey when power output requirements are low. When power output requirements are low, the electric motor powers the vehicle. When power output requirements are high, the combustion engine is automatically switched on. The engine is usually switched off when the vehicle is stationary. Consequently, there is usually no engine idling as with combustion engine vehicles. For pulling away and accelerating, the electric motor supports the internal combustion engine using the power stored in the high-voltage battery. In addition, the power is used for partially electric driving, operation of the electric coolant compressor and to support the 12 V on-board electrical system. In this way the hybrid drive system helps to reduce your vehicle's fuel consumption. Observe the driving tips on plug-in hybrid operation (Y page 230). If you remove your foot from the brake pedal while in transmission position D or R, the vehicle may pull away automatically. Observe the notes on the READY display of the ECO start/stop function (Y page 231). Vehicles with an electric motor generate much less driving noise than vehicles with internal combustion engines. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users in certain situations. This is the case, for example, when you are parking and your vehicle is not seen by other road users. This requires you to adopt a particularly anticipatory driving style, as it is necessary to allow for the possibility that other road users may behave erratically. Displays and operation Electric motor performance display Recuperative Brake System If you release the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion, overrun recuperation is initiated. The electric motor is operated as a generator when in overrun mode and when you brake. Hybrid technology converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electricity and stores it in the high-voltage battery. Observe the important safety notes for the Recuperative Brake System (Y page 45). Important safety notes If the engine is switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you open the driver's door: Ra message appears in the multifunction display and Ra warning tone sounds Further information (Y page 272). All of the vehicle's systems remain active, if: Rthe vehicle is stationary Rthe combustion engine is switched off and Rthe READY indicator in the instrument cluster lights up The power display for the electric motor is located on the right-hand side of the instrument cluster. RArea : to ; (E-DRIVE): This shows the electric output from the electric motor, e.g. during electric operation or in boost mode. When the motor is switched on, the display is at limit :. With increasing pressure on the accelerator pedal the display fills up from : to ;. Driving with the electric motor: when the display reaches limit ;, the combustion engine is switched on. If the display is approaching limit ; and you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the display empties again. The combustion engine is not switched on. At low speeds, you can thereby Z 225 Driving and parking PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation Driving and parking 226 control the electric operation usage so that you only drive in electric mode. Driving with the combustion engine: the electric motor supports the combustion engine by providing additional torque (boost mode) until the display reaches limit ;. You can also select the operating mode of the hybrid drive system (Y page 226). RArea = to ? (CHARGE): This shows the recuperated energy which is stored in the high-voltage battery as electrical energy. When the display reaches limit ?, the maximum recuperative braking power has been exhausted. The mechanical brake is activated. : Operating mode selected ; Operating mode unavailable = Operating mode available HYBRID Selecting the operating mode Button : allows you to choose between different operating modes. X Press button : to change the operating mode. The operating mode selected appears in the instrument cluster. If it is not possible to change operating modes, the display message Change the current drive program before chang‐ ing the operating mode. or Exit man‐ ual drive program M before changing the operating mode. appears in the multifunction display. Further information on "Display messages" (Y page 272). E-MODE RElectric mode or driving with the internal combustion engine is possible RAutomatic selection of drive mode with electric mode as often as possible RThe high-voltage battery is discharged to approximately 20% RTo subsequently maintain the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery, the electric output is reduced. All vehicle functions such as electric operation mode, energy recuperation or boost mode, for example, are still available. RElectric-only drive power output allotted using the haptic accelerator pedal (Y page 230) RInternal combustion engine activation using the haptic accelerator pedal RElectrical PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation CHARGE RElectric mode or driving with the internal combustion engine is possible RAutomatic selection of drive mode with electric mode as often as possible RThe current condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is maintained so the electrical energy can be used at a later time RElectric drive is not possible RCharging the high-voltage battery while driving using the combustion engine In automatic drive program S (Y page 229) and during manual gearshifting (Y page 229), only HYBRID operating mode is available. If you switch from automatic drive program S to automatic drive program E, HYBRID operating mode continues to be selected. If manual drive program M is deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts: Rinto the automatic drive program that was last selected the driving mode that was last selected Each time the engine is started, HYBRID mode is automatically selected. Rinto Menus and submenus Selecting displays in the display of the multimedia system Press the Ø button on the controller. The vehicle menu is displayed. X To select Energy Flow: turn and press the controller. The energy flow is displayed. or X To select Consumption: turn and press the controller. Fuel consumption and the generated electric energy are displayed. X To exit the display: press the % button on the controller. X Selecting the energy flow display in the multifunction display Use Ñ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Travel menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Select Energy Flow with : or 9 . The active hybrid components are highlighted in the energy flow display. X Energy flow display Overview energy flow display Operating the on-board computer You can display the current operating condition of the hybrid drive system in the multifunction display and on the display of the multimedia system (Y page 227). In the multimedia system display, you can also call up a graphic display of the fuel consumption and generated electricity (Y page 228). : ; = ? A Internal combustion engine Electric motor High-voltage battery condition of charge High-voltage battery Energy flow Z Driving and parking E-SAVE 227 228 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation The active hybrid components are highlighted. The energy flow is indicated by arrows. The arrows have a different color depending on the operating state. Driving and parking Displaying the total range and electrical range To reset the values: the values are reset along with the From Start trip computer (Y page 240). X To select Consumption: turn and press the controller. The display of the multimedia system shows fuel consumption : and electrical energy generated ; for the past 15 minutes of driving. Starting the engine The approximate range is based on the current driving style. X Use Ñ on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Travel menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the approximate total range and electrical range. Displaying fuel consumption and generated electricity The vehicle starts in electric mode without the internal combustion engine (noiseless start). The internal combustion engine starts only after the power demanded by the driver exceeds the available power that the electric motor can currently provide. Noiseless start operation is dependent on the outside temperature and the operating temperature of the internal combustion engine. If not all conditions for noiseless start operation are fulfilled, the vehicle starts with the internal combustion engine. Switch on the ignition. Depress the brake pedal. X Observe the notes on starting the engine (Y page 148). X Start the vehicle (Y page 148). The vehicle is operational when READY indicator : lights up. X X Pulling away Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. X If the Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' display message appears in the multifunction display, depress the brake pedal more firmly and select the desired transmission position. X : Fuel consumption ; Electrical energy generated Every bar of the graph displays the average value for one minute. Fuel consumption indicator : may differ from the indicator in the From Start trip computer in the Trip menu. PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation X Driving DYNAMIC SELECT switch available fuel grade. In this case, the ECO start/stop function is not available in any drive program, regardless of the display in the multimedia system display. Available drive programs: I Individual Individual settings S+ Sport Plus RExtremely sporty driving style with boost mode RElectric-only operation is not possible S Sport RSporty C Comfort RComfortable, economical Drive programs Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change the drive program. Depending on the drive program selected the following vehicle characteristics will change: Rthe drive (engine and transmission management) Rthe suspension Rthe steering Rthe climate control: - the climate control settings - the rear window defroster operation period - the performance of the seat heating Rthe availability of the Eco Assistant Each time you start the engine using the SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is activated. For further information about starting the engine, see (Y page 148). Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch : forwards or backwards until the desired drive program is selected. The status icon of the selected drive program is shown in the multifunction display. In addition, the current drive program settings are displayed briefly in the multimedia system display. i In a few countries, the ECO start/stop function is deactivated at the factory due to the X driving style with boost mode RElectric-only operation is not possible driving style RElectric-only sible E Economy drive is pos- RParticularly economical driving style RElectric operation mode is used as often as possible RDouble pulses in the haptic accelerator pedal, as an indication to release the accelerator pedal (Y page 230) RAfter the accelerator pedal has been released, the coasting characteristics of the vehicle are adapted to the traffic conditions. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 159). Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can temporarily change gears yourself. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 229). Manual gear shifting Using the steering wheel paddle shifters, you can temporarily change gears yourself. The transmission must be in position D. During manual gearshifting, the combustion engine is always switched on. Z Driving and parking Release the brake pedal. Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. For further information on pulling away (Y page 149). X 229 230 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation Driving and parking Activating when driving with the electric motor: X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 161). The combustion engine is switched on. Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. Activating when driving with the combustion engine: X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 161). Manual gearshifting is activated temporarily. The selected gear and M appear in the multifunction display. The ECO start/stop function is not available when manually changing gear. For further information on the manual drive program (Y page 161). Haptic accelerator pedal General notes The haptic accelerator pedal helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions of your vehicle. There are two different functions available for this purpose: Ran additional point of resistance in E-MODE operating mode (Y page 226) Ra double pulse in drive program E (Y page 229) Additional point of resistance in the haptic accelerator pedal The maximum available electric performance is indicated by a tangible point of resistance in the haptic accelerator pedal. The additional point of resistance is available in E-MODE operating mode (Y page 226). If you depress the haptic accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point, the combustion engine is switched on. Double pulses in the haptic accelerator pedal A tangible double pulse in the haptic accelerator pedal gives you a recommendation to release the accelerator pedal. By this means, in HYBRID, E-MODE or E-SAVE operating mode the combustion engine can be switched off and disconnected from the power train (overrun mode). The double pulse is available in drive program E (Y page 229). After the accelerator pedal has been released, the coasting characteristics of the vehicle are adapted to the traffic conditions. To avoid getting too close to the vehicle in front, you must apply the brakes manually when necessary. Driving tips General driving tips Drive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent and sudden acceleration as well as abrupt braking. During partial electric driving, pulling away and acceleration, the electric motor supports the internal combustion engine. During overrun in transmission position D and braking, the electric motor will operate as a generator. Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 231). Additional driving tips (Y page 179). Stationary vehicle If the vehicle is stopped, the combustion engine is, for the most part, switched off. Automatic climate control continues to function. The electromechanically assisted steering gear allows you to use the power steering without reduced comfort. Acceleration Depending on the operating mode, pulling away and driving under low load conditions are performed: Rentirely by electric propulsion Rin combination with the internal combustion engine When accelerating at an increased or full load, boost mode is utilized. The electric motor supports the internal combustion engine by providing additional torque when the accelerator is depressed rapidly. PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation There are three possible operating modes when the hybrid vehicle is decelerating: Renergy recovery takes place even when the vehicle is decelerating purely in overrun mode (Y page 225). The electric motor operates as a generator and stores the recovered energy in the high-voltage battery Rwhen the brakes are applied lightly, the vehicle is slowed down further by the electric motor This increases the energy recovery taking place (Y page 225) The electric motor operates as a generator and stores the recovered energy in the high-voltage battery. Rwhen the brakes are applied with greater force, the service brakes are also used to slow the vehicle down. The two systems work together Urban driving Energy is recuperated during frequent deceleration and stopping in city traffic. The vehicle can be driven by the electric motor alone up to a speed of approximately 120 km/h. The vehicle is driven by the electric motor alone only when all conditions for the automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled. Further information on the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 231). Driving on inter-urban roads The following phases are possible when driving on inter-urban roads: Rrapid acceleration (boost mode) Rconstant energy consumption Renergy recuperation Relectric operation mode A great deal of recovered energy may be available, depending on the route profile. This reduces consumption and emissions. Highway driving During highway driving, fuel consumption and emissions are favorably influenced in particular by reduced power losses. If the driver removes his foot from the accelerator pedal in drive program E and a speed of 160 km/h is not exceeded, the combustion engine is automatically switched off. Further information on the automatic engine switch-off (Y page 231). ECO start/stop function General notes The ECO start/stop function switches the internal combustion engine off automatically when the vehicle stops moving and at high speeds (Y page 232). All vehicle systems remain active, e.g. the automatic climate control. The ECO start/stop function is only available in drive programs C and E. Electric-only operation is only possible in drive programs C and E. Additional information for drive programs (Y page 229). Automatic engine switch-off The engine is switched off automatically, including when: Rthe driver removes his foot from the accelerator in drive program E and a speed of 160 km/h is not exceeded (Y page 232) Rthe engine has reached its operating temperature Rthe driver’s seat belt is fastened and the driver’s door is closed Rthe driver only slightly depresses the accelerator pedal in order to, for example, maintain the current speed for a limited distance Rthe hood is closed and engaged properly Rthe high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently Rno malfunctions are present in the hybrid drive system The internal combustion engine will not be switched off automatically, if: Rthe self-diagnosis function of the engine control unit is still active Rthere is a malfunction in the hybrid drive system Rthe climate control of the vehicle requires it Rthe high-voltage battery is being charged (Y page 227) Rautomatic emissions tests are running Z Driving and parking Overrun mode or braking 231 232 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation Driving and parking Automatic engine start The automatically switched-off internal combustion engine starts automatically in certain situations, if: Rthe power demand from the driver via the accelerator pedal is greater than the electric motor alone can provide Rthe driver switches to drive program S or M Rthe condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has reached the lower limit Rthe settings of the automatic climate control require it, e.g. at external temperatures above 30 † Overrun mode In overrun mode, the combustion engine is switched off and is disconnected from the drive train. The electric motor: Rgenerates low thrust, which corresponds to the overrun mode of an active combustion engine Rfunctions as a generator and produces the necessary energy for the auxiliary consumers and charges the high-voltage battery Overrun mode is available in drive program E below 160 km/h. In drive program E, after the accelerator pedal has been released the coasting characteristics of the vehicle are adapted to the traffic conditions. Further information about the haptic accelerator pedal (Y page 230). Route-based energy management For route-based energy management, the system factors in information about the expected route when route guidance is active. The information on the route is provided by the multimedia system and includes the following: Rroad categories Rspeed limitations Rdata on downhill gradients The use of electric energy is automatically optimally distributed from the beginning to the end of the journey, using information about the route. The distribution is pre-emptive and takes into consideration: Rthe sections of the journey ahead Rthe energy consumption on the whole route The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is thus systematically controlled. In addition, the control function takes into account that: Rthe fuel savings through the use of electrical energy can vary, depending on the route (e.g. urban, interurban or highway) Rthe use of electrical energy is held available in particular for electric operation (e.g. urban routes) The vehicle thus automatically selects the optimum driving mode for the respective section of the route. Route-based energy management is available under the following conditions: Rdrive program E is selected RHYBRID driving mode is selected Ractive route guidance is activated Rsuitable map data is available When route-based energy management is in operation, the area in front of the vehicle is shown as green in the multifunction display. Parking Apply the electric parking brake. The red ! indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the automatic transmission to P. X Switch the ignition off. The READY indicator in the instrument cluster goes out. Further information on parking and switching off the internal combustion engine (Y page 177). X PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation 233 Problems with PLUG-IN HYBRID operation Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot start the internal combustion engine. The multifunction display shows no display messages. The READY indicator in the multifunction display is off. For example, self-diagnosis is not yet complete or the hybrid drive system is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Try to start the internal combustion engine again. If the internal combustion engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. You wish to pull away, but the ECO start/stop function does not start the internal combustion engine. The READY indicator in the multifunction display is off. The ECO start/stop function has failed. The warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up. X Shift the transmission to P. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Start the engine. Driving and parking Internal combustion engine The hybrid drive system is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Recuperative Brake System Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Braking resistance is G Risk of accident reduced and brake pedal The Recuperative Brake System is malfunctioning. travel is longer than usual. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display (Y page 255). X Observe the information regarding indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster (Y page 288) . Z 234 PLUG‑IN HYBRID operation Driving and parking Hybrid drive system Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The hybrid drive system has been switched off automatically. You have been in an accident. The hybrid drive system remains switched off if: Rthe internal combustion engine cannot be restarted after a few seconds. Rthe red 6 restraint system warning lamp in the instrument cluster is lit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The hybrid drive system An electrical short circuit has occurred in the hybrid drive system or an has been switched off electrical connection has been disconnected. automatically. The multi- X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction disfunction display also play (Y page 255). shows a display mesX Consult a qualified specialist workshop. sage. Displays and operation G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only: G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Pull over as soon as it is safe to do so and consult a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the multifunction display. You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at all times. For an overview, see the instrument panel illustration (Y page 36). Displays and operation Instrument cluster lighting The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using brightness control knob :. X Turn brightness control knob : up or down. If you turn the light switch (Y page 118) to the T, à or L position, the brightness will depend upon the brightness of the ambient light. i The light sensor in the instrument cluster automatically controls the brightness of the multifunction display. In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are illuminated. A dimming function is not possible in daylight. Speedometer with segments The speedometer is divided into segments on Mercedes-AMG vehicles or vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS. The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 185): The segments light up from the stored speed to the type-tested maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 186): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front that is driving at a slower speed than the stored speed: Z On-board computer and displays Important safety notes 235 236 Displays and operation On-board computer and displays The segments between the speed of the vehicle in front and the stored speed light up. Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the multifunction display shows the coolant temperature in the Coolant submenu (Y page 246). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). Operating the on-board computer Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Bear in mind that the outside temperature display indicates the temperature measured and does not record the road temperature. The outside temperature display is in the multifunction display (Y page 237). Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. Coolant temperature display G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. ! A display message is shown if the coolant temperature is too high. If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. All vehicles except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the coolant temperature display is in the lower section of the tachometer (Y page 36). : Multifunction display ; Right control panel = Left control panel X To activate the on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. You can control the multifunction display and the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Left control panel ò ROpens 9 : Press briefly: RScrolls the menu list in lists a menu or function RIn the Radio or Media menu: opens the track or station list and selects a station, an audio track or a video scene RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and selects a name or a telephone number RSelects 9 : Press and hold: 8 RMute RScrolls ó RVehicles quickly through all lists the Radio or Media menu: selects a station, audio track or video scene using rapid scrolling RIn the Telephone menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open RIn a RIn all menus: confirms the selected entry in the list the Radio or Media menu: opens the list of available radio sources or media RIn the Telephone menu: switches to the phone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn ñ with Audio 20: Switches off voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches off the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) % Press briefly: with Audio 20: Switches on voice-operated control for navigation (see manufacturer's operating instructions) RVehicles with COMAND: Switches on the Voice Control System (see the separate operating instructions) Multifunction display RVehicles RBack RIn the Radio or Media menu: dese- lects the track or station list or list of available radio sources or media RHides display messages RExits the telephone book/redial memory % Press and hold: RCalls up the standard display in the Trip menu Right control panel ~ RRejects 6 RMakes W X RAdjusts or ends a call the telephone book/redial memory RExits or accepts a call to the redial memory RSwitches : Drive program (Y page 157) ; Transmission position (Y page 158) = All vehicles, except PLUG-IN HYBRID vehi- cles: additional speedometer (Y page 251) ? Display A Time B PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: outside temperature or additional speedometer (Y page 251) Display panel ? shows the selected menu or submenu and display messages. X To open the menu list: press the ò button on the steering wheel. Display panel ? appears in the menu list. the volume Z 237 On-board computer and displays Displays and operation 238 Displays and operation Possible displays in the multifunction display: On-board computer and displays RZ Gearshift recommendation, when shifting manually (Y page 161) Rj Active Parking Assist (Y page 202) RCRUISE Cruise control (Y page 185) RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: READY PLUG-IN HYBRID operation activated (see the Digital Operator's Manual) RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: HYBRID operating mode, additional operating mode displays (see the Digital Operator's Manual) RPLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: è electric range (see the Digital Operator's Manual) R_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 120) Rè ECO start/stop function (Y page 150) Rë HOLD function (Y page 194) Ra DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot (Y page 192) Rsunglasses with polarization filters roads Rblocking of sunlight by objects on the display cover In the event of extreme sunlight, sections of the display may fade. This can be reversed by switching the head-up display off and on again. Rwet i Vehicles with the head-up display are equip- ped with a special windshield. Should repairs be necessary, have the windshield replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Displays and operation Switching the head-up display on/off Head-up display General notes The head-up display projects information from the navigation system and the driver assistance system above the dashboard into the driver's field of vision. A requirement for the display of the contents is that the following functions are available in the vehicle and are switched on: RCruise control RDISTRONIC PLUS RTraffic Sign Assist RNavigation The head-up display allows the driver to see all of the information without having to take his eyes off the road. X Press button :. When the head-up display is switched on, the display appears in the driver's field of vision. Standard displays in the head-up display Important safety notes The head-up display is only an aid and is not a substitute for attentive driving. The visibility of the head-up display is influenced by the following conditions: Rthe driver's seat position Rthe positioning of the display image Rthe general ambient light : ; = ? The head-up display shows the following contents and information: Navigation messages Current speed Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS set speed Detected traffic signs Menus and submenus Menus and submenus Menu overview Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Operating the on-board computer (Y page 236). Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can select the following menu: RTrip menu (Y page 239) instructions) RNavi menu (navigation (Y page 241) RRadio menu (Y page 243) menu (Y page 243) RTelephone menu (Y page 245) RAssistance Graphic menu (Y page 246) RService menu (Y page 246) RSettings menu (Y page 247) RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 252) RMedia : ; = ? A B The head-up display shows the following contents and information: Current engine speed Current speed Upshift indicator Currently selected gear, gearshift options when shifting manually RACETIMER Lap Setting options You can adjust the following settings in the head-up display submenu: Radjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield (Y page 250) Radjust the brightness of the displays in the head-up display (Y page 250) Rselect desired displays in the head-up display (Y page 249) Using the Display Content function, you can, depending on your vehicle's equipment, choose between four standard displays. The selected contents then appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMG-specific contents. If you select a display with traffic signs, detected traffic signs from Traffic Sign Assist appear in the head-up display. Trip menu Standard display X Press and hold the % button on the steering wheel until the Trip menu with trip odometer : and odometer ; appears. Z On-board computer and displays AMG displays in the head-up display AMG displays are available in Mercedes-AMG vehicles. 239 240 Menus and submenus On-board computer and displays Displaying the range and current fuel consumption Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select ECO display. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the ECO display will be automatically reset. For more information on the ECO display, see (Y page 180). X Trip computer "From Start" or "From Reset" Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only displays approximate range :. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the menu displays current fuel consumption ;. In the subsequent message, the multifunction display shows the approximate electrical range as well as the total range (Y page 228). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press 9 or : to select the display with approximate range : and current fuel consumption ;. Approximate range : that can be covered is calculated according to your current driving style and the amount of fuel in the tank. If there is only a small amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueled C appears instead of approximate range :. Recuperation display = shows you if energy has been recuperated from the kinetic energy in overrun mode and saved in the battery. Recuperation display = depends on the engine installed and is therefore not available in all vehicles. ECO display The ECO display is not available in MercedesAMG vehicles. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. Odometer Driving time Average speed PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: emission-free trip distance A Average fuel consumption : ; = ? Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select From Start or From Reset. X The values in the From Start submenu are calculated from the start of a journey, while the values in the From Reset submenu are calculated from the last time the submenu was reset (Y page 241). In the following cases the trip computer is automatically reset From Start: Rthe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. Menus and submenus Digital speedometer Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the digital speedometer. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Navi menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Route guidance not active Resetting values Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the function that you wish to reset. X Press the a button. X Press : to select Yes and press a to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display If you reset the values in the ECO display, the values in the "From Start" trip computer are also reset. If you reset the values in the "From Start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. X Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions : Direction of travel ; Current road Route guidance active No change of direction announced : ; = ? Distance to the next destination Estimated arrival time Distance to the next change of direction Current road In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. You can find further information on navigation instructions in the separate operating instructions. Z On-board computer and displays When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been exceeded, the trip computer is automatically reset From Reset. 241 On-board computer and displays 242 Menus and submenus Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation Change of direction without lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction : Road into which the change of direction ; = ? ; Distance to change of direction and visual A B leads Distance to the change of direction Change-of-direction symbol Recommended lane and new lane during a change of direction (white) Possible lane Lane not recommended (dark gray) On multilane roads, new lane recommendations can be displayed for the next change of direction if the digital map supports this data. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Lane not recommended B: you will not be able to complete the next change of direction if you stay in this lane. Possible lane A: you will only be able to complete the next change of direction in this lane. Recommended lane ?: in this lane you will be able to complete the next change of direction and the one after that. leads distance display = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is to be made, you will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction. The change of direction starts once the distance display reaches zero. Change of direction with lane recommendation : Road into which the change of direction leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction symbol ? Lane recommendation Other status indicators of the navigation system : Additional information Other possible additional information: RNew Route... or Calculating Route... A new route is calculated. RRoad Not Mapped The vehicle position is inside the area of the digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g. newly built streets, car parks or private land. RNo Route No route could be calculated to the selected destination. RO You have reached the destination or an intermediate destination. Radio menu position is only displayed along with station ; if this has been stored. You can store TV channels ; in the multimedia system. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Radio menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Currently set station ; appears in the multifunction display. X To open the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station in the station list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a station in the station list using rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9. X To select the frequency range or station memory: press a briefly. X Press : or 9 to select the frequency range or station memory. X Press a to confirm the selection. i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normal radio. Further information on radio operation can be found in the multimedia system (see the separate operating instructions). Media menu Changing the media source : ; = ? Frequency range Station frequency with memory position Name of artist Name of track The multifunction display shows station ; with station frequency or station name. The preset You can change the media source and playback mode (audio or video) at any time in the Media menu. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To open/close the media sources list: press a briefly. The list shows the following media sources, for example: Z 243 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus 244 Menus and submenus RDisc (CD/DVD) (DVD COMAND only) card RMedia Register (COMAND) RUSB storage device RBluetooth® capable audio device Please observe further information on media support and media operation in the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). On-board computer and displays RSD Operating an audio player or audio media To select to next or previous track in the track list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a track in the track list using rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9 until you reach the desired track. If you press and hold the button, the speed of rapid scroll increases after a short time. Not all audio drives or data carriers support this function. If the corresponding track information is stored on the audio drive or audio media, the multifunction display may display the following: Rtrack number Rtrack name Rartist Ralbum The track information does not appear in audio AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external audio source connected). X Video DVD operation : Media source, e.g. name of USB memory ; = ? A stick Current title Name of artist Name of album Folder name Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select an audio player or media: press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears. X Press : or 9 to select the corresponding audio player or media. X Press a to confirm. X To open the track list: press : or 9 briefly. Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Media menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X To select a DVD single drive or disc: press a briefly. The list containing the media sources appears. X Press : or 9 to select the corresponding DVD single drive or disc. X Press a to confirm. X To open the scene list: press : or 9 briefly. X Menus and submenus Telephone menu Introduction G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. When telephoning, you must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving. X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer’s operating instructions). X Switch on the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio 20 or COMAND, see the separate operating instructions. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. You will see one of the following display messages in the multifunction display: RPhone READY or the name of the network provider: the mobile phone has found a network and is ready to receive. RPhone No Service: there is no network available or the mobile phone is searching for a network. Accepting a call If someone calls you when you are in the Tele‐ phone menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. You can accept a call at any time, even if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Press the 6 button on the steering wheel to accept an incoming call. Rejecting or ending a call You can end or reject a call at any time even if you are not in the Telephone menu. X Press the ~ button on the steering wheel to reject or end a call. Selecting an entry in the phone book Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the :, 9 or a button to switch to the phone book. X Using : or 9, select the names one after the other. or X To start rapid scrolling: press and hold : or 9 for longer than one second. The names in the phone book are displayed quickly one after the other. If you press and hold the : or 9 button for longer than five seconds, the name appears with the next or previous letter initial letter in the alphabet. Rapid scrolling stops when you release the button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the : or 9 button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. X Z On-board computer and displays To select the next or previous scene in the scene list: press : or 9 briefly. X To select a scene in the scene list using rapid scroll: press and hold : or 9 until desired scene : has been reached. X Press a to confirm your selection. X 245 Menus and submenus 246 or On-board computer and displays X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or % button. Redialing The on-board computer saves the last names or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Telephone menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the redial memory. X Press the : or 9 button to select the desired name or number. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button. Assistance graphic menu RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186) Sign Assist (Y page 215) RDistance warning and the autonomous braking function COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 70) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 77) RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 216) or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 219) RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 214) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 218) or Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 222) X Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST assessment. RTraffic Service menu Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Service menu: RCalling up display messages in message memory (Y page 255) RChecking the tire pressure electronically (Y page 369) RCalling up the service due date (Y page 334) RDisplaying the coolant temperature (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 246) Displaying the coolant temperature Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Assistance Graphic menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. The multifunction display shows the DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the assistance graphic. The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving systems or driving safety systems: X The Coolant menu is only available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. Observe the notes on coolant temperature (Y page 236). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Coolant submenu. X Press a to confirm your selection. The coolant temperature is shown in a bar display. Menus and submenus Introduction Depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle, you have the following options in the Settings menu: RChanging assistance settings (Y page 247) RChanging HYBRID settings (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 248) RChanging head-up display settings (Y page 249) RChanging the light settings (Y page 250) RChanging the instrument cluster settings (Y page 251) RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 252) Assistance submenu Deactivating/activating ESP® Observe the "Important safety notes" section in the description of ESP® (Y page 73). G WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the following situations: Rwhen using snow chains Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Deactivating/activating ESP® in MercedesAMG vehicles (Y page 74). For further information about ESP®, see (Y page 73). X Start the engine. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the DriveAs‐ sist submenu. X Press a to confirm. Press : or 9 to select ESP. Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the å warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the vehicle is ready to drive, ESP® is deactivated. If the ÷ and å warning lamps light up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the information on warning lamps (Y page 290). Observe the information on display messages (Y page 256). X X Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press 9 or : to select Collision Prevention. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. For further information about COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70). X Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehicles with the Driving Assistance package. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Z On-board computer and displays Settings menu 247 Menus and submenus 248 Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the multifunction display in the Assistance Graphic menu. On-board computer and displays X For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 77). Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Blind Spot Assist. X Press a to confirm. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. For further information about Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 216). For further information about Active Blind Spot Assist, see (Y page 219). X Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select ATTENTION ASSIST. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Off, Standard or Sensitive. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é symbol appears in the Assistance Graphic menu in the multifunction display. For further information about ATTENTION ASSIST, see (Y page 214). X Setting Lane Keeping Assist Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the DriveAssist submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Lane Keeping Assist. X Press a to confirm. The current selection, Standard or Adap‐ tive, appears. X To change the setting: press a again. X For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 218). For further information about Active Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 222). HYBRID submenu (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Setting the maximum charge current Using the Max. Charge Current function, you can limit the charge current value at which the high-voltage battery should be charged. If there are no charge current settings on the charging cable, set the maximum charge current in the on-board computer. If there are no charge current settings on the charging cable, set the maximum charge current on the charging cable (Y page 172). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Menus and submenus Before charging the high-voltage battery, check the maximum permissible charge current for the relevant power socket. The maximum charge current values in the onboard computer may deviate from the charging cable values. Further information on charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 169). Setting the departure time Using the "Setting departure time" function you can: Rclimatize the vehicle interior before departure. Further information on pre-entry climate control (Y page 142). Rcharge the high-voltage battery at minimum cost before departure at an intelligent charging station. The vehicle will calculate an optimal loading plan. The charging process starts when the electricity is at the best price possible. As a result, the high-voltage battery is charged with electricity at a favorable rate. Please note that the high-voltage battery may not be fully charged by the time of departure. Depending on the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery and the selected departure time, the necessary charge time may not be sufficient. If you would like to charge the high-voltage battery for a short period of time, please use the setting "set no departure time and charge immediately". The charging process will start immediately when you charge the high-voltage battery at a normal charging station and have already selected the departure time. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Press : or 9 to select the Hybrid submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Departure Time function. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to save the setting. X To set no departure time and charge immediately: press the : or 9 to select No Pre-selection. X Press a to confirm. or X To set a departure time: press : or 9 A, B or C to select the desired preset. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. X Press : or 9 to set the hours. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to set the minutes. X Press a to confirm. If the selector lever is shifted to position P and the charging cable connector is plugged in, the multifunction display will show the complete charging prediction after a few moments. Further information on charging the high-voltage battery (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) (Y page 169). X Head-up display submenu Selecting other displays : Vehicle speed display ; Vehicle speed and navigation instruction display = Vehicle speed display and Traffic Sign Assist Using the Display Content function, you can choose from up to four display options dependZ On-board computer and displays Use : or 9 to select the Hybrid submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Max. Charge Current function. You will see the selected setting. X Press the a button to save the setting. X 249 On-board computer and displays 250 Menus and submenus ing on the vehicle's equipment. The selected contents appear in the head-up display. In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, you can also choose between two AMG displays. If you select an AMG display, the head-up display shows AMGspecific contents. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select Display Con‐ tent. X Press a to confirm. A graphic selection list appears. X Press : or 9 to select the desired display. X Press the a button to confirm the selection. You can find further information on navigation displays in the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). Information on displays of Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 215). Setting the position You can adjust the position of the head-up display on the windshield. You can compensate for height differences if the seat positions are changed, for example. X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Position function. X Press the a button to save the setting. Press the : or 9 button to adjust the position to a level from Level +5 to Level -5. X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Using the Memory function, you can save and call up the set position of the head-up display as a single memory preset (Y page 116). X Setting the brightness The brightness of the head-up display is automatically adjusted to the surrounding ambient light. You can also individually adjust the brightness of the head-up display. X Switch on the head-up display (Y page 238). X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Head-up Display submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Brightness function. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the brightness to a level from Level +5 (bright) to Level -5 (dark). X Press the a or % button to save the setting. Light submenu Switching the daytime running lamps on/ off This function is not available in Canada. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Lights submenu. X Press a to confirm. Using : or 9, select the Daytime Running Lights function. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol are shown in white in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Further information on daytime running lamps Daytime Running Lights (Y page 118). Instrument cluster submenu Selecting the distance unit The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function allows you to choose whether certain displays appear in kilometers or miles in the multifunction display. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer function. The current setting km or Miles appears. X Press the a button to save the setting. The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu and the trip odometer RTrip computer RCurrent consumption and the range RRange RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu RCruise Control RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot RASSYST PLUS service interval display ROdometer Selecting permanent display This function is only available on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. The Permanent Display function allows you to choose whether the multifunction display always shows the outside temperature or the speed. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Press : or 9 to select the Permanent Display function. X Press a to confirm. The current setting Outside Temperature or Speedometer [inverseHardwareSpeedUnit] appears. X To change the setting: press a again. Switching the additional speedometer on/off This function is not available in PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles. If the additional speedometer is switched on, the speed is shown in the status bar in the multifunction display instead of the outside temperature. The speed display is inverse to the speedometer. X Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press : or 9 to select the Instru‐ ment Cluster submenu. X Press a to confirm. X Using : or 9, select the Additional Speedometer [km/h] function. The current selection appears. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Z 251 On-board computer and displays Menus and submenus Menus and submenus 252 Restoring the factory settings Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the Settings menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Use : or 9 to select the Factory Settings submenu. X Press a to confirm. The Reset All Settings? function appears. X Press : or 9 to select No or Yes. X Press a to confirm the selection. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction display shows a confirmation message. On-board computer and displays X atures ? and A are displayed in white in the multifunction display. If the multifunction display shows oil temperature ? or A in blue, the engine or the transmission are not yet at normal operating temperature. Avoid driving at full engine output during this time. G-Meter For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu is only reset when the vehicle is stationary. AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) WARMUP : ; = ? A Digital speedometer Gear indicator Charge-air pressure Engine oil temperature Transmission fluid temperature Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. Engine and transmission oil temperatures: when the engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature, oil temper- X The G-Meter shows you the forces working on the driver in longitudinal and lateral direction while driving. Maximum values are marked red in the guideline system. X Press ò on the steering wheel to open the menu list. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the GMeter appears. The G-Meter's maximum values are stored. X To reset the G-Meter: press a again. X Using : or 9, select Yes on the steering wheel. X Press a to confirm. The G-Meter's maximum values are deleted. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the G-Meter will be automatically reset. Menus and submenus SETUP 253 RACETIMER Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +/ Race Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport + Transmission D/M Exhaust system Comfort/Sport + ESP® On/Off or SPORT handling mode Sport SETUP displays the following information and functions: Rthe gear indicator Rthe digital speedometer Rthe drive system setting Rthe suspension setting Rthe transmission position Rthe exhaust flap position Rthe ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) status X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed. : ; = ? A : Lap ; RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads. You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER. Starting a new lap : Lap ; RACETIMER = Quickest lap time Z On-board computer and displays Displaying and starting RACETIMER Menus and submenus 254 Press the : or 9 button to select New Lap. X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays X A maximum of 32 laps may be stored. Stopping the RACETIMER Press : or 9 to select Stop. The RACETIMER is stopped. X Press : or 9 to select Reset. X Press a to confirm. All laps are deleted. X Lap statistics X X Press : or 9 to select Stop. Press a to confirm. Continuing the RACETIMER X X Press : or 9 to select Continue. Press a to confirm. Resetting the RACETIMER : ; = ? Lap Lap time Average lap speed Lap length This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press the : or 9 button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select Lap List. X Press a to confirm. The lap statistics are displayed. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. Display messages 255 Display messages General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may therefore differ from the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. With certain display messages, you will also hear a warning tone. You can hide the display messages. The display messages are then stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as soon as possible. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 194) RParking (Y page 177) Hiding display messages Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. The multifunction display hides the display message. High-priority display messages are shown in red in the multifunction display. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied. X Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: Press the ò button on the steering wheel to open the menu list. Press : or 9 on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Confirm by pressing a on the steering wheel. X Press the : or 9 button to select the message memory. If there are no display messages, the No Messages display appears in the multifunction display. When there are display messages, the number of stored messages appears. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to scroll through the display messages. X X Z On-board computer and displays Introduction 256 Display messages On-board computer and displays Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) are temporarily not available. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient. Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. X !÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷ and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster may also light up. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Z 257 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 258 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions T! ÷ EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. Inoperative See Operator's Manual G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. F(USA only)!(Canada only) Turn On the Igni‐ tion to Release the Parking Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the ignition was switched off. X Switch on the ignition. F(USA only)!(Canada The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 178). You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. only) Please Release Park‐ X Release the electric parking brake manually. ing Brake The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 178). F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: Switch the ignition off. Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X or X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not drive on. Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 380). X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X X Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 259 260 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions On-board computer and displays The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X X Shift the transmission to position P. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the selector lever to P, as the electric parking brake is not applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake manually: X F(USA only)!(Canada only) Parking Brake Inop‐ erative Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 178). The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of overvoltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. $(USA only)J(Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. USA only: the $ red brake system warning lamp is lit while the Check Brake Pad Wear engine is running. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Restart the engine. Inoperative Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 261 On-board computer and displays 262 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Collision Preven‐ tion Assist Plus Inoperative COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Inopera‐ tive See Operator's Manual Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Man‐ ual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RMercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Restart the engine. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP® on again (Y page 74). PRE-SAFE Functions Limited See Opera‐ tor's Manual PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Man‐ ual At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems is temporarily restricted or inoperative: RPRE-SAFE® PLUS Brake RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS RActive Lane Keeping Assist RActive Blind Spot Assist RDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will not perform a course-correcting brake application. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty Rthe function of the driving system or driving safety system is impaired due to heavy rain or snow A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Switch off the engine. X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 339): Rin the radiator trim Rin the front bumper Rin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper X Restart the engine. The display message disappears. RPRE-SAFE® 6 SRS Malfunction Ser‐ vice Required The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46). Z 263 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 264 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Front Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Front Right Malfunction Service Required 6 Rear Left Malfunc‐ tion Service Required or Rear Right Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 6 The rear center restraint system has malfunctioned. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Center Malfunc‐ G WARNING tion Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey, even though: bag Disabled See Operator's Manual Ran adult or Ra person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the frontpassenger front air bag (Y page 54) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐ abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 54). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 265 266 Display messages On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger Air‐ The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even though: bag Enabled See Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the frontpassenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Ra self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultaneously for approximately six seconds Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 54) Rthe display messages Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Dis‐ abled See Operator's Manual must not appear in the multifunction display X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF or ON indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 54). Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The corresponding bulb is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. or X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 122). Check Left Low Beam (Example) X i LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed. b Active Headlamps Inoperative The active light function is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The light sensor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone also sounds. X Turn the light switch to the à position. Malfunction See Operator’s Manual Auto Lamp Function Inoperative Switch Off Lights b Switch On Headlamps You are driving with low-beam headlamps switched off. Turn the light switch to the L or à position. X Z 267 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 268 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant Level See Operator's Man‐ ual ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine X cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 333). If you have to add coolant frequently: X ? Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine cooling system checked. The fan motor is faulty. At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off G WARNING Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Wait until the engine has cooled down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. If the temperature increases again: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). # See Operator's Man‐ ual The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Rdefective power electronics (PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles) Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Z 269 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 270 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual display message. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The battery charge level is too low. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running # Start Engine See Operator's Manual 4 Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling X The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low. Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster and interior lighting. X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long distance. The battery is being charged. X The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332). X If the engine oil needs topping up more often: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth- erwise be damaged. Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 332). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332). X If the engine oil needs topping up more often: Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the engine checked. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedesbenz.com. X 4 Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off 8 Fuel Level Low C 8 Gas Cap Loose Mercedes-AMG vehicles: The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Check the engine oil level (Y page 332). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 332). The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. Refuel at the nearest gas station. X There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. X The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Z 271 On-board computer and displays Display messages 272 Display messages On-board computer and displays Hybrid drive system Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions d PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: You are exiting the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. The READY indicator in the multifunction display is on. A warning tone also sounds. If you leave the vehicle: X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Switch off the ignition and remove the SmartKey. Vehicle Operational Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting If you do not leave the vehicle: Switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. automatic climate control, seat heating. Please note the following: The electrical consumers are supplied by the 12 V battery. If the vehicle is left in a ready-to-drive state for an extended period, it will switch off once the 12 V battery is almost empty. It will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a second battery (jump-starting). X Change the current drive program before changing the operating mode. or Exit manual drive program M before changing the operat‐ ing mode. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: You have attempted to change the operating mode in the automatic drive program S (Sport), S+ (Sport Plus) or in the manual drive program M. X Activate drive program C (Comfort) or E (Economy) (Y page 229). X Select the preferred operating mode HYBRID, E-MODE, E-SAVE or CHARGE (Y page 226). E-MODE Currently Unavailable PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The condition of charge of the high-voltage battery has dropped to the lower limit and the E-MODE operating mode has been switched off. Driving with the internal combustion engine is activated and the operating mode switches to the basic HYBRID setting. X Continue driving using the internal combustion engine. You can switch to the E-SAVE or CHARGE operating mode as required (Y page 226). If you select CHARGE, the high-voltage battery is charged. Once the charge level display for the high-voltage battery has increased slightly, you can switch to the E-MODE operating mode again. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only E-MODE Availa‐ ble Power Limited Refuel Immediately PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The fuel tank has been run dry and the combustion engine has been switched off. A warning tone also sounds. The vehicle will be powered by electrical energy only. Performance is restricted and the vehicle may accelerate more slowly than normal. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. In the "Total range and electric range" menu, you can display the approximate range of the vehicle (Y page 228). Engine will not restart Service required You cannot start the engine again due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is running: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If you switch off the engine: X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. á The hybrid drive system is faulty. X Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Û The hybrid drive system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Û The hybrid drive system is faulty. X Have the vehicle towed away by a professional recovery company to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. d The drive system is malfunctioning. The ECO start/stop function may be malfunctioning. The drive power is restricted. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ï PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The charging cable connector is still connected to the vehicle socket. You cannot drive off as long as the charging cable connector is still connected. Before you drive off: X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket (Y page 173). Towing Not Permit‐ ted See Operator's Manual Malfunction Service Required Malfunction Malfunction Charger Cable Con‐ nected Z 273 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 274 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The fuel filler flap unlocking button has been pulled. The fuel tank must be depressurized before refueling. X Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized and the fuel filler flap is unlocked. The opening process for the fuel filler cap may take up to 15 minutes. Please Wait Depressurizing Tank 6 PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The fuel tank is now depressurized. The vehicle may now be refueled. Tank is Depressur‐ ized Ready for Refu‐ X Observe the information on refueling on the fuel filler flap. X Open the fuel filler cap and remove it (Y page 166). eling 6 PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: There is a malfunction in the fuel system. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ã PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The sound generator is not working. The vehicle can still be driven; however, no vehicle sounds can be generated. As a result, your vehicle may not be heard by other road users until it is very close to them, or it may not be heard at all. X Drive with particular care, allowing for the possibility that other road users may behave unpredictably. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Tank Ventilation Malfunction Service Required Acoustic Vehicle Indication Inopera‐ tive Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also sounds. X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! À ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ¨ Vehicle Rising ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ¨ The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning tone also sounds. X Do not pull away. The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears. ¨ You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low. AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Vehicle Rising Please Wait Stop Vehicle Vehi‐ cle Too Low AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds. Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large. X Listen for scraping sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level. Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehicle. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X ¨ The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual or Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Clean the windshield. Malfunction Z 275 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 276 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual or Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Restart the engine. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative or Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Canceled The driver's door is open. X Repeat the parking gap measurement and parking process with the driver's door closed. You touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally. The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 202). Park Assist Inoper‐ ative PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning or faulty. X Follow the instructions and helpful hints in the "Problems with PARKTRONIC" section (Y page 202). If the multifunction display still shows the display message: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Parking Assist is unavailable or faulty. X Switch off the ignition and restart the engine. If Active Parking Assist continues to be unavailable (the j symbol does not appear in the multifunction display): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Park Assist Switched Off The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. The display message disappears automatically. Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display message disappears. Traffic Sign Assist is operational again. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ë Off Traffic Sign Assist is faulty. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 194). The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled. A warning tone also sounds. X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (Y page 194). DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 186). If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS Now Available DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186). Z On-board computer and displays Display messages 277 On-board computer and displays 278 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Man‐ ual DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. RThe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Restart the engine. DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. erative The following may have also failed: RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist RPRE-SAFE® Brake RSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ pended You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS - - - mph An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DTR+: Steering Assist. Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Clean the windshield. DTR+: Steering Assist. Inoperative Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty. However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Inop‐ Cruise control is malfunctioning. erative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control - - - mph RA condition for activating cruise control has not been met. You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. RESP® is deactivated. The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. or X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 185). or X Reactivate ESP®. Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) Z 279 On-board computer and displays Display messages 280 Display messages On-board computer and displays Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire Pressure Soon Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. Possible causes: Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed new wheels and tires. Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 343). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 367). Rthey Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367). Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please Correct Tire Pressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 367). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 369). Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 343). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthey Warning Tire Mal‐ function The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 343). Ryou Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavaila‐ ble Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been resolved. TirePress. Sen‐ sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Z 281 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 282 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N. Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake and Start Engine With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the transmission out of position P or N into another transmission position. X Depress the brake pedal. X Start the engine. Transmission Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in position R, N or D. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Close the driver's door completely. The vehicle is moving. Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying tionary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Service Required Do Not Shift Gears Visit Dealer You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. A warning tone also sounds. If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Reversing Not Possi‐ You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction. ble Service Required The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Mal‐ function Stop A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission components. A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to position N. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running Wait Transmission Cool‐ ing PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Leave the engine running. X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles only: The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. N The trunk lid is open. Close the trunk lid. X Z 283 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 284 Display messages Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. Close all the doors. X _ The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or righthand side. X Push the backrest back until it engages. _ The center rear seat backrest is not engaged. X Push the backrest back until it engages. & PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: With the engine switched off, you have attempted to switch on the preentry climate control more than twice. X Let the engine run for ten seconds. After running the engine, the pre-entry climate control is operational again. & PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: The on-board voltage is too low. The pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. X Drive for a longer distance. The battery is being charged. When the condition of charge of the high-voltage battery is over the specified minimum, pre-entry climate control is operational again. Rear Left Backrest Not Latched or Rear Right Backrest Not Latched Rear Center Back‐ rest Not Engaged Pre-Entry Climate Ctrl. (Via Smart‐ Key) Available Again After Engine Start Pre-Entry Climate Ctrl. (Via Smart‐ Key) Inoperative HV Battery Low Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ function See Opera‐ tor's Manual G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. X Add washer fluid (Y page 333). Check Washer Fluid SmartKey Display messages  Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  Take Your Key from Ignition Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. Use the correct SmartKey. X The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. Remove the SmartKey. X  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 84). Obtain a New Key Replace Key Battery Z 285 On-board computer and displays Display messages On-board computer and displays 286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  Don't Forget Your Key The SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. X Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.  The SmartKey is currently undetected. X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. Key Not Detected (white display message) If the SmartKey still cannot be detected: X  Key Not Detected (red display message) Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Locate the SmartKey. X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display message. Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, the key is not detected whilst the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.  Remove 'Start' But‐ ton and Insert Key The SmartKey is continually undetected. The SmartKey detection function has a temporary malfunction or is faulty. A warning tone also sounds. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster General notes Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or whilst driving. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 287 Safety Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50). ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50). The warning tone ceases. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or the front-passenger door is closed. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50). The warning lamp goes out. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out. ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50). The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Z On-board computer and displays Seat belts 288 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Safety systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions é N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow brake system warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow RBS (Recuperative Brake System) warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. G WARNING The brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake system warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. A warning tone also sounds. There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. G WARNING The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. $ N USA only: the red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The multifunction display also shows a display message with the # symbol. The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ABS warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution) is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available. Z 289 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 290 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $J ÷! N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake warning lamp and the yellow ESP® and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is running. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the red brake warning lamp, yellow ESP® warning lamp and ABS are shown in the READY driving status. ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP®: Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73). Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP® warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running or the ECO start/stop function is activated. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: the yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is shown in the READY driving status. ESP® is deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform braking actions. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases it may be better to deactivate ESP®: Rall vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) RMercedes-AMG vehicles (Y page 74) Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 73). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP® checked. Z 291 On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays 292 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions M N Only Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. SPORT handling mode is activated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions described in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (Y page 74). F! N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric parking brake flashes or is lit and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric parking brake is lit. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. 6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is faulty. G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 46). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 293 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There may be a malfunction, for example: Rin the engine management Rin the fuel injection system Rin the exhaust system Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with gasoline engines) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. 8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up. The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap. X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop. ? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the coolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale. The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective. The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z On-board computer and displays Engine On-board computer and displays 294 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. The coolant level is too low. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 333). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. ? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds. The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low. G WARNING The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 333). X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic. X Driving systems Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning tone also sounds. You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at too high a speed. X Be prepared to brake immediately. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take evasive action. Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 77). For further information about the distance warning function of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 70). Z On-board computer and displays Warning/ indicator lamp 295 296 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster On-board computer and displays Tires Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires. G WARNING Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac- tion. driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 343). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 367). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rthe h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. G WARNING The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure. There is a risk of an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 297 Warning/ indicator lamp N Signal type Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð N The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. On-board computer and displays Vehicle G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X X Drive on carefully. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X X Do not drive on. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Z 298 Function restrictions General notes The multimedia system section in this manual describes the basic principles for operation. More information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Important safety notes Multimedia system G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. The multimedia system calculates the route to the destination without taking the following into account, for example: Rtraffic lights and yield signs Rparking or stopping restrictions Rroad narrowing Rother road and traffic rules and regulations The multimedia system may give incorrect navigation recommendations if the actual street/ traffic situation does not correspond with the digital map's data. For example: Ra diverted route Rthe road layout or the direction of a one-way street has been changed For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving recommendations. Navigation announcements are intended to direct you while driving without diverting your attention from the road and driving. Rstop Please always use this feature instead of consulting the map display for directions. Looking at the icons or map display can distract you from traffic conditions and driving, and increase the risk of an accident. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that is deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 8 inches (20 cm) and more between the radiator and a person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and legs.) G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring can impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particular, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as intended and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Function restrictions For safety reasons, some functions are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion. You will notice this, for example, because either you will not be able to select certain menu items or a message will appear to this effect. Operating system Operating system Switching the sound on/off Overview X ! Do not use the space in front of the display for storage. Objects placed here could damage the display or impair its function. Avoid any direct contact with the display surface. Pressure on the display surface may result in impairments to the display, which could be irreversible. Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your ability to read the display. The display has an automatic temperature-controlled switch-off feature. The brightness is automatically reduced if the temperature is too high. The display may temporarily switch off completely. Cleaning instructions ! Do not touch the display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you have to clean the screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free cloth. The display must be switched off and have cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not apply pressure to the display surface when cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible damage to the display. Switching the multimedia system on/off X Press the u button on the center console to the right of the controller. Adjusting the volume Turn the thumbwheel to the right of the controller. The volume is adjusted: Rfor the currently selected media source Rduring traffic or navigation announcements Rin hands-free mode during a phone call X Press the thumbwheel to the right of the controller. If the audio output is switched off, the status line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch the media source or set the volume, the sound is automatically switched on. i Navigation announcements will be heard even if the sound is muted. Functions The multimedia system has the following functions: RRadio mode RMedia mode with media search RSound systems RNavigation system COMAND: navigation via the hard drive Audio 20: navigation via SD card RCommunication functions RSIRIUS Weather (COMAND) RVehicle functions with system settings RFavorites functions Controller The controller in the center console lets you: Rselect menu items on the display Renter characters Rselect a destination on the map Rsave entries The controller can be: Rturned 3 Rslid left or right 1 Rslid forwards or back 4 Rslid diagonally 2 Rpressed briefly or pressed and held 7 Back button You can use the % button to exit a menu or to call up the basic display of the current operating mode. Z Multimedia system General notes 299 Operating system 300 To exit the menu: briefly press the % button. The multimedia system changes to the next higher menu level in the current operating mode. X To call up the basic display: press the % button for longer than two seconds. The multimedia system changes to the basic display of the current operating mode. X Multimedia system Touchpad Switching the touchpad on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ tingsQActivate Touchpad. The touchpad is switched on O or off ª. Operating the touchpad Swiping with two fingers, e.g. using this function: X To show or hide the audio menu: swipe up or down with two fingers. X To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. X To increase or reduce the vehicle and sound settings: turn two fingers to the right or left. Character entry with handwriting recognition Entering characters Use one finger to write characters on the surface. The character is entered in the input line. If the character that you have entered can be interpreted in different ways, these character suggestions are displayed. X If character suggestions are shown, turn and press the controller. X Resume the character entry on the touchpad. X Handwriting recognition : Touch-sensitive surface ; Favorites button = Calls up audio and telephone menu (quick access) ? Returns to the previous display Navigating in menus and lists can be done via touch-sensitive surface : by swiping with your finger. To select the menu item: swipe up, down, to the left or right. X Press the touchpad. X To move the digital map: swipe in all directions. X : ; = ? X Active input line Inserts a space Character entered on the touchpad Deletes characters To display the menu: press the touchpad. Operating system 301 Quick access for audio : Exits the menu ; Returns to handwriting recognition = Uses the phone book or text templates (COMAND) ? Selects the input line or changes the posi- tion of the cursor A Switches the language B Finishes character entry X X To select the input line: select p. Swipe up or down. To move the cursor within the input line: select p. X Swipe to the left or right. X X To delete characters: swipe to the left if an input line is selected. X To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. Switching the text reader function of the handwriting recognition on/off Multimedia system: X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ tingsQRead Out Handwriting Recog‐ nition. The read-aloud function is switched on O or off ª. Depending on the audio source that is currently activated, you can use this function to select the next station or music track. X Swipe upwards with two fingers on the touchpad. The current audio source is displayed. X To select the previous or next station/ music track: glide to the right or left. The selected station/music track is played. Switching the character entry between touchpad and controller Prerequisite: an input line for text, numbers or characters has been selected. X To switch to the controller: press the controller. Character entry using the controller is active. X To switch to the touchpad: press the touchpad with your finger. Handwriting recognition on the touchpad is active. Favorites Calling up and exiting favorites To call up: press the ò button on the controller or on the touchpad. X Select a favorite, e. g. Vehicle. The favorites are displayed. X To exit: press the ò button again. X Z Multimedia system Changing the station/music track Operating system 302 Adding favorites Adding a predefined favorite You can find all available climate control functions in the climate control menu. You can use the climate control bar to switch to the climate control menu. Multimedia system Overview : ; = ? Adds a new favorite Renames a selected favorite Moves a selected favorite Deletes a selected favorite Press the ò button. Slide 6 the controller. The menu bar is shown. X Select Reassign. The categories are displayed. X Select a category. The favorites are displayed. X Select a favorite. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X X Adding your own favorite Select VehicleQClimate Control. X Press and hold the ò button until the favorites are displayed. X Add a favorite at the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. X Climate control settings General notes You can adjust the climate control settings using the climate control bar or the climate control menu. You can set the most important climate control functions such as temperature, airflow and air distribution using the climate control bar. The climate control bar is visible in most displays. Example: COMAND : Adjusts temperature and air distribution on the left and displays the current setting ; Calls up the climate control menu, displays the current cooling and climate mode setting = Adjusts temperature and air distribution on the right and displays the current setting There may be fewer settings or none depending on your vehicle's equipment. Calling up the climate control menu Multimedia system: Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated. X To select from climate control bar ;: turn and press the controller. The menu for selecting climate control functions is activated. X To select the desired climate control function: turn and press the controller. The selected climate control function appears. X Calling up the climate control bar Multimedia system: Select Vehicle. The vehicle menu is displayed. X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the climate control bar is activated. X Operating system Adjusting the climate mode settings By setting the climate mode you determine the type of airflow. The setting is active when the airconditioning system is set to à (Y page 133). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X To select Climate Mode: turn and press the controller. X To change the setting: turn the controller. Exiting a menu: X Press the % button. Activating or deactivating pre-entry climate control via the SmartKey This function is available for PLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles. PLUG-IN HYBRID: before getting in, the driver's seat area can be briefly warmed or ventilated in advance with the air from the air vents being precooled. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X To select Pre-entry Climate Control via Key: turn and press the controller. X To activate or deactivate: turn the controller. The current airflow setting is shown in the climate control bar: DIFFUSE, MEDIUM or FOCUS. Exiting a menu: Starting/stopping the perfume atomizer Activating or deactivating pre-entry climate control at departure time The perfume atomizer makes it possible to scent the air in individual compartments in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 138). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X To select Air Freshener: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active. X To start/stop the perfume atomizer: press the controller. X To set the intensity: turn the controller when the atomizer is switched on. Exiting a menu: X Press the % button. Switching the ionization on/off The ionization has a cleansing effect on the air in the vehicle interior. Further information (Y page 140). X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X To select Ionization: turn and press the controller. The setting element is active. X To switch the ionization on/off: press the controller. Exiting a menu: X Press the % button. X Press the % button. This function is available for PLUG‑IN HYBRID vehicles. You can climatize the driver's seat and the vehicle interior in time for the departure time set. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X To select Pre-entry Climate Ctrl. at Departure Time: turn and press the controller. A rotary menu appears. X To select the desired setting: turn the controller. The menu symbol, text and image show the selected setting. X To exit a menu: Press the % button. Settings in the bottom bar of the climate control menu Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated. X To select O A/C: turn and press the controller. X Switch cooling with air dehumidification on O or off ª. X Z Multimedia system Settings in the climate menu 303 304 Operating system i The current status of the cooling function is displayed in the climate control bar: A/C ON – activated, A/C OFF – deactivated. i Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function reduces fuel consumption. Multimedia system Synchronizing the climate control settings Use O Sync (synchronization) to select the climate control setting for all zones together O or separately ª. X Call up the climate control menu (Y page 302). X Slide 6 the controller repeatedly until the bottom bar is activated. X To select O Sync: turn and press the controller. X Switch the synchronization function on O or off ª. For further information on synchronizing climate control settings, see (Y page 135). Navigation mode Important safety notes G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the navigation system. General notes Among other things, correct functioning of the navigation system depends on GPS reception. In certain situations, GPS reception may be impaired, there may be interference or there may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages. Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN® MAP PILOT (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Garmin® MAP PILOT operating instructions are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file. The SD card box contains a quick guide. The following descriptions apply to navigation with COMAND. Further information can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. Selecting a route type and route options Multimedia system: Select NaviQNavigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select OptionsQRoute Settings. Notes for route types: X REco Route Traffic Route Traffic reports on the route for the route guidance are taken into account. RCalculate Alternative Routes Different routes are being calculated. Instead of Start select the Continue menu item. Notes for route options: RDynamic RUse Toll Roads The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a usage fee (toll). RUse Vignette Roads (not available in all countries) The route calculation includes roads which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). A vignette allows temporary use of the route network, e. g. 10 days or 1 year. RUse Carpool Lanes (only available in the USA) Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access conditions for carpool lanes. Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool lanes option is activated. Entering an address Multimedia system: Select NaviQNavigation. The map shows the vehicle's current position. X Slide 6 the controller. X Select DestinationQAddress Entry. X Operating system Rsearch for a keyword The keyword search finds destinations using fragments of words. Rselect the last destination Rselect a contact Rselect a POI You can search for a POI by location, name or telephone number. Rselect destination on the map Renter intermediate destination You can map the route to the destination yourself with up to four intermediate destinations. Rselect destinations from Mercedes-Benz Apps Rselect geo-coordinates Calculating the route Prerequisite: the address has been entered and is in the menu. X Select Start or Continue. The route is calculated with the selected route type and the selected route options. If route guidance has already been activated, a prompt will appear asking whether you wish to end the current route guidance. X Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐ tination. Yes cancels the current route guidance and starts route calculation to the new destination. Set as Intermediate Destination adds the new destination in addition to the existing destination and opens the intermediate destinations list. Connecting a mobile phone Prerequisites For telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, you require a Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone. The mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile 1.0 or above. Multimedia system: Select VehicleQSystem Set‐ tingsQActivate Bluetooth. X Activate Bluetooth® O. X Mobile phone: X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Bluetooth® visibility for other devices (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® device names for all of one manufacturer's products might be identical. To make it possible to clearly identify your mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message Access Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the following information will be transmitted after you connect: Rphone book Rcall lists Rmessages i Further information on suitable mobile phones can be obtained on the Internet at http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ connect. Z Multimedia system Enter an address, e.g. as follows: or zip code, street, house number Rcountry, town or zip code Rcity or zip code, center Rstreet, city or zip code, intersection X Select City. The city in which the vehicle is currently located (current vehicle position) is at the top. Below this, you will see locations for which route guidance has already been carried out. X Enter the city. The G symbol: the location is contained on the digital map multiple times. X To switch to the list: slide the 5 controller. X Select the location. If available, the zip code is shown. If there are different zip codes available for the location, the corresponding digits are displayed with an X. X Enter the street and house number. The address is in the menu. Further options for destination entry: Rtown 305 Operating system 306 i In the USA you can also contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). In Canada, you can get in touch with the Customer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100. Multimedia system Searching for and authorizing a mobile phone Before using your mobile phone with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to search for the phone and then authorize (connect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, authorization either takes place by means of Secure Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The multimedia system automatically makes the procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone available. The mobile phone is always connected automatically after authorization. Further information on using a mobile phone with the multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's Manual). If the multimedia system does not detect your mobile phone, this may be due to particular security settings on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Only one mobile phone can be connected to the multimedia system at any one time. Searching for a mobile phone Audio 20: X Select Tel/®QConnect DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart Search. The available mobile phones are displayed. COMAND: Select PhoneQConnect DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart Search. The available mobile phones are displayed. Symbols in the device list X Connecting a mobile phone Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing: X Select mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. X If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia system. X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X If the codes are different: select No on the multimedia system. The process is canceled. Repeat authorization. Authorization by entering a passkey: Select Bluetooth® name of the mobile phone. The input menu for the passkey is displayed. X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combination as a passkey. X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system. X Press ¬ to confirm. X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile phone. Depending on the mobile phone used, confirm the connection to the multimedia system and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up to two minutes to be displayed (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Switching between mobile phones If you have authorized more than one mobile phone, you can switch between the individual phones. Multimedia system: X Select Connect Device. Select a mobile phone from the device list. Symbol Explanation Ï New mobile phone found, not yet authorized. Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but is not connected General notes # Mobile phone is authorized and connected If you wish to play external media sources, the default display must already be turned on. Fur- X Media mode Operating system ther information on media mode (see the Digital Operator's Manual). The following external media sources can be used: RApple® RUSB RCD devices (e.g. iPhone®) devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player) RDVD (COMAND) RSD memory cards Rvia devices connected by Bluetooth® i Information on single CD/DVD drive (see 307 Ejecting an SD memory card Press the memory card. The memory card is ejected. X Remove the memory card. X Connecting USB devices There are two USB ports in the stowage space under the armrest. X Connect the USB device to the USB port. X Select the media source (Y page 307). Multimedia system the Digital Operator's Manual). Activating media mode Multimedia system: Select MediaQDevices. The available media sources will be shown. The # dot indicates the current setting. X Select the media source. Playable files are played. X Inserting and ejecting an SD memory card Important safety notes G WARNING SD memory cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of children. If an SD memory card is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. ! If you are no longer using the SD memory card, you should remove it and take it out of the vehicle. High temperatures can damage the card. Inserting an SD memory card The SD card slot is located in the stowage compartment under the armrest. X Insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot until it engages. The side with the contacts must face downwards. X Select the media source (Y page 307). Z 308 Stowage areas Stowage areas Loading guidelines Stowage and features G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid open. G WARNING If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when transporting a load: RNever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are specified on the vehicle iden- tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door. RThe trunk is the preferred place to carry objects. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as possible and as low down in the trunk as possible. RThe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for protection. Stowage spaces Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308). Stowage areas Stowage compartments in the front 309 Eyeglasses compartment Glove box To open: press marking :. The eyeglasses compartment opens down. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. X Objects in A4 format or an iPad®, for example, can be stored in the glove box. For vehicles with a perfume atomizer (Y page 138) the storage space of the glove box is restricted. Stowage compartment in the front center console X The glove box can only be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position 1. Briefly press trim ; in the direction of the arrow. Cover : swings upwards. Stowage compartment under the armrest X To open: press button : at the front. The stowage space opens. Z Stowage and features X 310 Stowage areas Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following may be in the stowage space: Ra multimedia connector unit with 2 USB ports and a SD card slot, e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3 player, see the separate Operator's Manual Ra small stowage space in the upper front section Stowage and features Stowage compartment in the doors You can store items such as a rolled-up fluorescent jacket (driver's door) and the vehicle document wallet (front-passenger door) in stowage compartment : in the doors. In doors ; you can store bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter). Stowage space in the rear Stowage compartment in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cover of the stowage compartment before folding the rear seat armrest back into the seat backrest. X X To open: fold down the seat armrest. Press on the front of release catch : and fold the cover of the armrest upwards. Additional stowage space Depending on the equipment, the following additional stowage areas are available in the vehicle: Rcard and coin holder in the dashboard above the light switch (not suitable for holding thin objects such as shopping tokens) Rthe open stowage compartment in the center console Rstowage net in front-passenger footwell Rthe map pockets on the back of the driver's and front-passenger seat Rthe parcel nets on the left and right-hand side in the trunk Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 308). Ski and snowboard bag Important safety notes G WARNING The skibag in conjunction with the lashing straps cannot restrain any objects other than skis. Vehicle occupants could be struck in the event of sudden braking or an accident, for instance, if you: Rtransport other heavy or sharp-edged objects in the skibag Rdo not secure the skibag with the lashing straps There is a risk of accident and injury. Store only skis in the skibag. Always secure the skibag with the lashing straps so that it cannot move around. A maximum of four pairs of skis or two snowboards can be transported in the ski and snowboard bag. Stowage areas Securing the ski and snowboard bag in the trunk 311 Rear bench seat through-loading feature Fold the middle rear seat backrest forwards (Y page 311). X Slide the ski and snowboard bag between the two outside rear seat backrests. Ensure that the wheels of the ski and snowboard bag are in the trunk. X Open the ski/snowboard bag with zip : and place the skis or snowboards inside it. X Close the ski and snowboard bag. X Pull tensioning strap ; tight by the loose end until the skis or snowboards are held firmly inside the ski/snowboard bag. X G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308). The outside and the middle rear seat backrests can be folded down separately to increase the trunk capacity. The division ratio is 40% to 20% to 40%. Folding the rear seat backrests forward Vehicles without memory function: if necessary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward. X Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forward, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. X Open the trunk. X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head restraints. X X Engage tensioning strap = in a diagonal pattern on hooks ? in cargo tie-down rings A as shown. Z Stowage and features Important safety notes Stowage areas 312 Fold corresponding rear seat backrest ; forward. X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. X Folding the rear seat backrest back ! Make sure that the seat belt does not become trapped when folding the rear seat backrest back. Otherwise, it could be damaged. Left and right seat backrest Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest release handle :. The corresponding rear seat backrest is released. Vehicles with memory function: when one or both parts of the rear seat backrest are folded forward, the respective front seat moves forward slightly, when necessary, in order to avoid contact. Stowage and features X Left and right seat backrest Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it engages. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone also sounds. X Middle rear seat backrest X Pull release lever = forwards. Rear seat backrest ; is released. Middle rear seat backrest X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward if necessary. X Fold seat backrest : back until it engages. Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visible. Stowage areas Adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 107). X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat back if necessary. You should always engage the rear seat backrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will prevent unauthorized access to the trunk from the vehicle interior. X 313 RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. In order to prevent the trunk from being accessed by unauthorized persons, the center seat backrest can be locked using a catch. The center seat backrest can only be folded forward together with the left seat backrest. X To lock: fold the left and center seat backrests forward. Make sure that the center and left seat backrests are engaged and joined together. X Slide catch : upwards. The release mechanism of the center seat backrest is locked. X To unlock: fold the left and center seat backrests forward. X Slide catch : downwards. Securing cargo Vehicles with the through-loading feature in the rear bench seat: X Fold up the cargo tie-down rings next to the rear seat backrest and put them through the slots in the carpet. Bag hook G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing directions. There is a risk of injury. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load. Cargo tie-down rings Observe the following notes on securing loads: RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 308). RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down rings evenly. Z Stowage and features Locking the center rear seat backrest 314 Stowage areas The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the box moves downward until it rests on the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is avoided. Adjusting the height to any position Stowage and features : Bag hook EASY-PACK trunk box Important safety notes G WARNING When the load surface moves up, your hands may become trapped on the frame of the EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury. When the load surface moves up, make sure that your hands are not within the sweep of the load surface. If someone becomes trapped, carefully push the center of the load surface downward. ! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled out, no objects may be placed on the frame of the box, nor should the frame be pushed from above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged. ! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and then be thrown out. There is a risk of injury. Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure these or similar objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Example Pull the box out by handle : in the direction of the arrow all the way to the stop. X Lowering the load surface: push the center of load surface ; down by hand in the direction of the arrow until load surface ; has reached the desired position and the box is the desired size. X To raise the load surface: press switch =. Load surface ; of the box moves up automatically. X To stow the box: push the box in by handle : all the way to the stop. X Removing and installing ! If you exceed the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always observe the maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Example X To install: insert retainer ; of box : into slots = Stowage areas Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf. Stowage well under the trunk floor ! Unhook the handle before again before clos- ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to prevent the handle flap from protruding. Otherwise, you could damage the handle. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;. Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section (Y page 394). ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are located in the stowage compartment. X To open: pull handle : up. use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps to avoid damage to the vehicle. Position the load on the roof carrier in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is installed you can: Rraise the sliding sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fully Ropen the trunk lid fully ! To avoid damaging or scratching the covers, do not use metallic or hard objects to open them. An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load may become detached from the vehicle. You Z Stowage and features Raise box : and press hooks A into anchorage ? as far as they will go. X Turn left-hand rotating catch B counterclockwise and right-hand rotating catch B clockwise by 90°. X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise and right-hand rotating catch B counter-clockwise by 90°. X Move box : downwards and pull it out from anchorages ?. X 315 Features 316 must therefore ensure that you observe the roof carrier manufacturer's installation instructions. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel cannot be opened if a roof carrier is installed. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can still be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel makes contact with a roof carrier approved by Mercedes-Benz, the sunroof will lower slightly but remain raised at the rear. Stowage and features Attaching the roof carrier RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. RAlways ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. ! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup holder in the center console to continuous, strong and direct sunlight. The passenger compartment in the area of the center console can otherwise be damaged by the concentrated and reflected sunlight. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 308). Open covers : carefully in the direction of the arrow. X Fold covers : upwards. X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage points under covers :. X Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Cup holder in the front-compartment center console Features Cup holder Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. If you remove the cup holder insert, you can use the resulting compartment for stowage. X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 309). X To remove: slide catch = forwards and pull out cup holder ;. X To insert: insert cup holder ; and slide back catch =. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. Features 317 Cup holder in the rear seat armrest ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it. ! Close the cup holder before folding the rear : ; = ? A Mirror light Bracket Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket Vanity mirror Mirror cover Vanity mirror in the sun visor Fold down the rear seat armrest. X To open: press the front of cup holder : or ;. Cup holder : or ; extends automatically. X To fold out: place a container in the cup holder. The cup holder folds down automatically. X To fold in: remove the container. The cup holder folds in automatically. X To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until it engages. X Sun visors Overview G WARNING Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up. Rear side window roller sunblinds ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. Z Stowage and features seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder could be damaged. Features 318 X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the top of the window. Ashtray Front ashtray ! The stowage space under the ashtray is not Rear window roller sunblind Stowage and features Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could be trapped in the sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a risk of injury. When extending or retracting make sure that no parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again if someone becomes trapped. The opening or closing process is briefly stopped. The roller sunblind then returns to its initial position. ! Make sure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other objects could be damaged. Extending/retracting the roller sunblind heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage space could be damaged. Example X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 309). X Push the cover of the ashtray upwards at its right side =. X To remove the insert: hold the sides of insert ?, push it forward and lift it up ; and out. X To install the insert: press insert ? into the holder until it engages. X To close: close the cover of the ashtray. X Push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. i You can remove the ashtray insert and use the resulting compartment for stowage. Rear-compartment ashtray Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To extend or retract: briefly press button :. The roller sunblind fully extends or fully retracts. X To stop: briefly press button : again. The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves back into the out-of-use position. X Features Cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Ra Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: push cover : of the stowage compartment closed. X 12 V sockets General notes X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). The sockets can be used for accessories with a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories include such items as chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. An emergency cut-out ensures that the onboard voltage does not drop too low. If the onboard voltage is too low, the power to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compartment open. This prevents the cover from being blocked. Socket in the front-compartment center console To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 309). X Lift up the cover of the socket. X To close: push the cover of the stowage compartment closed. X Socket in the rear-compartment center console Example Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X To open: open the stowage compartment (Y page 309). X Pull the cover out by the top of its handle edge. X Lift up the cover of the socket. X Z Stowage and features To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge. To remove the insert: push ribbing = from the left side and pull insert : upwards. X To install the insert: install insert : from above into the holder and press down into the holder until it engages. X X 319 320 Features mbrace Stowage and features General notes The mbrace system is only available in the USA. You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure that your system is activated and operational. To log in, press the ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be activated. If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service, a user ID and password will be sent to you by mail. You can use this password to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. The system is available if: Rit has been activated and is operational Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is available for transmitting data to the Customer Center Ra service subscription is available Determining the location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if: RGPS reception is available. Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to the Customer Assistance Center. The mbrace system To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as follows: X Press the W or X button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Use the volume control on the multimedia system. The system offers various services, e.g.: RAutomatic and manual emergency call RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call You can find information and a description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. System self-test After you have switched on the ignition, the system carries out a self-diagnosis. A malfunction in the system has been detected if one of the following occurs: RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does not come on during the system self-test. RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside Assistance button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system. RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red after the system self-diagnosis: - SOS button - F Roadside Assistance call button - ï MB Info call button RThe Inoperative or the Service Not Activated message appears in the multifunction display after the system self-diagnosis. If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. In the event of an emergency, help will have to be summoned by other means. Have the system checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 Emergency call Important safety notes G WARNING It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, even if you have pressed the SOS button in an emergency if: Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident vehicle is on a dangerous section of road Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be seen by other road users, particularly when dark or in poor visibility conditions Rthe Features There is a risk of an accident and injury. Leave the vehicle immediately in this or similar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. Move to a safe location along with other vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure the vehicle in accordance with national regulations, e. g. with a warning triangle. 321 The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display and must be confirmed. In this case, summon assistance by other means. Making an emergency call To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open. X Press and hold SOS button ; for at least one second. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :. X If the mobile phone network is unavailable, mbrace will not be able to make the emergency call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after pressing the SOS button, you will not know whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In this case, always summon assistance by other means. Roadside Assistance button Z Stowage and features General notes Observe the notes on system activation (Y page 320). An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually. As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. Once the connection has been made, the Call Connected message appears in the multifunction display. All important information on the emergency is transmitted, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determined by the GPS system) Rvehicle identification number Rinformation on the severity of the accident Shortly after the emergency call has been initiated, a voice connection is automatically established between the Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center attempts to get more information on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. If no voice connection can be established to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, the system has been unable to initiate an emergency call. This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. Features 322 Stowage and features X To call Roadside Assistance: press Roadside Assistance button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on the multimedia system, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center can ascertain the nature of the problem (Y page 325). The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. You can find more information in the separate mbrace manual. The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button F is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X or X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. MB Info call button X To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :. This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while the connection is being made. The Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: Rcurrent location of the vehicle Rvehicle identification number The multimedia system display indicates that a call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available in this case. A voice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. You receive information about operating your vehicle, about the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and about other products and services from Mercedes-Benz. Features Call priority When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. The indicator lamp of the respective button flashes until the call is ended. An emergency call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other calls can be ended by pressing: Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel Rthe corresponding button in the multimedia system to end the voice call When a call is initiated, the audio system is muted. The mobile phone is no longer connected to the multimedia system. However, if you want to use your mobile phone, do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. Downloading destinations Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi- gation system in your vehicle. If you know the destination, the address can be downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the location of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity. Furthermore, you can download routes with up to four way points. You are prompted to confirm route guidance to the address entered. SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. The destination download function is available if: Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Rthe relevant mobile phone network is available and data transfer is possible. X Route Assistance This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package and cannot be purchased separately. You can use the route assistance function even if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation system. Within the framework of this service, you receive a professional and reliable form of navigation support without having to leave your vehicle. The customer service representative finds a suitable route depending on your vehicle's current position and the desired destination. You will then be guided live through the current route section. Search & Send General notes To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be equipped with mbrace and a navigation system. Additionally, an mbrace service subscription must be completed. "Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A destination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation system. Z Stowage and features You can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http:// www.mbusa.com. The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. The Call Failed message appears in the multifunction display. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the multifunction steering wheel. or X Press the corresponding multimedia system button for ending a phone call. 323 Features 324 Specifying and sending the destination address Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. X To send the destination address to the email address of your mbrace account: click on the corresponding button on the website. Example: If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will be sent to your vehicle. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: Enter the e-mail address you specified when setting up your mbrace account into the corresponding field. X Click "Send". Information on specific commands such as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the website. Stowage and features X Calling up a transmitted destination address Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). The transmitted destination address is loaded into the vehicle's navigation system. A display message appears, asking whether navigation should be started. X SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1 the controller and confirm with 7. The system calculates the route and subsequently starts the route guidance with the address entered. If you select No the address can be stored in the address book. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual destination must be confirmed separately. Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were sent. If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts: If multiple vehicles are registered under the same e-mail address, the destination will be sent to all the vehicles. X Vehicle remote opening You can use the vehicle remote opening if you have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened remotely. The vehicle remote unlocking feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®, Android) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Vehicle remote closing The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be locked by the MercedesBenz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, remote closing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked remotely. The vehicle remote closing feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network is available and a data connection is possible. X Contact the following service hotlines: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 You will be asked for your password. The next time you are inside the vehicle and you switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked Remotely message appears in the multifunction display. Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via: Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section Rthe telephone application (e. g. for iPhone®, Android) To do this, you will need your identification number and password. Stolen vehicle recovery service If your vehicle has been stolen: X Notify the police. The police will issue a numbered incident report. X This number will be forwarded to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center together with your PIN. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center then tries to locate the system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle is located. However, only the law enforcement agency is informed of the location of the vehicle. If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center is automatically notified. Vehicle Health Check With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer Assistance Center can provide improved support for problems with your vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the Customer Assistance Center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind of assistance is required. You are then, for example, guided to the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance Center. The Roadside Assistance Connected message appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health Check can be started, the Request for Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐ cle diagnostics? message appears in the display. X Press the Yes button to confirm the message. X When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please Start Ignition message appears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehi‐ cle to a safe position. message appears: please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle to a safe position. The message in the display disappears. The vehicle operating state check begins. During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐ cle Diagnostics Active message. If you select Cancel, the Vehicle Health Check is canceled completely. When the check is complete, the Sending vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐ nection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears. The vehicle data can now be sent. X Press the OK button to confirm the message. The voice connection with the Customer Assistance Center is terminated. The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ ring Data... message appears. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Depending on what the customer service representative agreed with you, the voice connection is re-established after the transfer is complete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone. Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is the transfer of service data to the Customer Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display shows a message to this effect together with information about any special offers at your workshop. This information can also be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Information on the data stored in the vehicle (Y page 32). Z 325 Stowage and features Features 326 Features Information on Roadside Assistance (Y page 29). Stowage and features Downloading routes Downloading routes allows you to transfer and save predefined routes in the navigation system. A route can be prepared and sent by either a customer service representative or under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Each route can include up to four way points. Once a route has been received by the navigation system, you will see the External route ICON_POI_Category Name_1 has been saved to "Previous destinations". Would you like to start navigation? message on the multimedia system display. The route is saved. X To start route guidance: select Yes. An overview of the route is shown in the display. If you select No, the saved route can be called up later in the navigation menu. X Select Start. Starting route guidance. Downloaded and saved routes can be called up again. You can find further information in the separate multimedia system operating instructions. Speed alert You can define the upper speed limit, which must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a message will be sent to the Customer Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance Center then forwards this information to you. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The data you receive contains the following information: Rthe location where the speed limit was exceeded Rthe time at which the speed limit was exceeded Rthe selected speed limit which was exceeded Geo fencing Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries of the selected areas. You can select the way in which you receive this information beforehand. Possible options include text message, e-mail or an automated call. The area can be determined as either a circle or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Different settings are possible for each area. These settings can be called up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and inform the customer service representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. Currently inactive areas can be activated by text message. Triggering the vehicle alarm With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Garage door opener General notes The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Use the integrated garage door opener only on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Once programed, the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the function of the garage door system's remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. When programming a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programming. Certain garage door drives are incompatible with the integrated garage door opener. If you have difficulty programing the integrated garage door opener, contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center. Alternatively, you can call the following telephone assistance services: RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RCanada: Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of charge) More information on HomeLink® and/or compatible products is also available online at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 31). USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Important safety notes G WARNING When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, persons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is a risk of injury. When using the integrated garage door opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage door. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation. Programming Programming buttons Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 327). Garage door remote control A is not included with the integrated garage door opener. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. X To start programming mode: press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. The garage door opener is now in programming mode. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time. If the selected button has already been programmed, indicator lamp : will only light up yellow after ten seconds have elapsed. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X To program the remote control: point garage door remote control A towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm). X Press and hold button B on remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code (Y page 328). X Release button B on remote control A for the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Z 327 Stowage and features Features 328 Features Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Stowage and features Synchronizing the rolling code Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" (Y page 327). If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage door system with the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will need to use the programming button on the door drive control panel. The programming button may be located in different places depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located on the door drive unit on the garage ceiling. Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Programming additional remote controls", before carrying out the following steps. Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure that neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of the door or gate. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Get out of the vehicle. X Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate the next step. X Get into the vehicle. X Press previously programmed button ;, = or ? on the integrated garage door opener repeatedly and in quick succession until the door closes. The rolling code synchronization is then complete. Notes on programming the remote control Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break" (or interruption) of the transmission signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore, these signals may not last long enough for the integrated garage door opener. The signal is not recognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Proceed as follows: Rif you live in Canada Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where you live) when using the programming steps X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door opener. After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. X Press button B of garage door remote control A for two seconds, then release it for two seconds. X Press button B again for two seconds. X Repeat this sequence on button B of remote control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programming is finished. When indicator lamp : flashes green: programming was successful. The next step is to synchronize the rolling code. X Release button B of remote control A of the garage door drive. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programming process for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Problems when programming If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the rearview mirror, take note of the following instructions: RCheck the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and whether it is supported. The transmitter frequency can usually be found on the back of the garage door drive remote control. The integrated garage door opener is compatible with devices that have units which Features Opening/closing the garage door After it has been programmed, the integrated garage door opener performs the function of the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions for the garage door system. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programmed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. X Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary. Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared. Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. Slide the relevant seat back. To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat. X X Z Stowage and features operate in the frequency range of 280 to 433 MHz. RReplace the batteries in garage door remote control A. This increases the likelihood that garage door remote control A will transmit a strong and precise signal to the integrated garage door opener. RWhen programming, hold remote control A at varying distances and angles from the button which you are programming. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programming steps with this remote control. Before performing these steps, make sure that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission. 329 330 Engine compartment Engine compartment Hood Important safety notes G WARNING If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. There is a risk of an accident. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. Maintenance and care G WARNING When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. Open and close the hood only when no one is within its range of movement. G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is overheated or when there is a fire in the engine compartment could expose you to hot gases or other service products. There is a risk of injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. If you need to do any work inside the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition reach into the area where there is a risk of danger from moving components, such as the fan rotation area Rnever Rremove jewelry and watches items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts Rkeep G WARNING The ignition system and the fuel injection system work under high voltage. If you touch components which are under voltage, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of injury. Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. Opening the hood G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are not folded away from the windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield wipers or the hood. Engine compartment 331 Engine oil Important safety notes G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the components before starting the engine. General notes X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled strut. Closing the hood Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force. X Radiator Do not cover up the radiator, such as with a thermal mat or insect protection cover. The readings of the on-board-diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times. Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rall vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG C 63/C 63S): the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait approximately 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. The oil level of the Mercedes-AMG C 63/C63 S must only be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. Z Maintenance and care Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Pull release lever : on the hood. The hood is released. X G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Engine compartment 332 Checking the oil level using the oil dipstick ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much engine oil can result in damage to the engine or to the catalytic converter. Have excess engine oil siphoned off. Example Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide tube. X Wipe off oil dipstick :. X Slowly slide dipstick : into the guide tube to the stop, and take it out again after approximately 3 seconds. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil. Maintenance and care X Adding engine oil H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment. ! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system Rreplacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacement specified by the service system has been exceeded Rusing engine oil additives. Example Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn clockwise. Ensure that the cap locks into place securely. X Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick (Y page 332). Further information on engine oil (Y page 391). X Additional service products Important safety notes G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. G WARNING The cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. ASSYST PLUS G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Checking coolant level Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = in the filler neck when cold, there is enough coolant in coolant expansion tank ;. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck when warm, there is enough coolant in expansion tank ;. X If necessary, add coolant that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 392). X Adding washer fluid to the windshield washer system Park the vehicle on a level surface. Only check the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the Start/Stop button twice (Y page 146). X Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster (Y page 236). The coolant temperature must be below 158 ‡ (70 †). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). or X On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab and open. X Add the premixed washer fluid. X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck until it engages. If the washer fluid level drops below the recommended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears in the multifunction display prompting you to add washer fluid (Y page 285). Further information on windshield washer fluid/ antifreeze (Y page 393). X ASSYST PLUS Service message The ASSYST PLUS service interval display informs you of the next service due date. Z Maintenance and care Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly open the cap to relieve pressure. 333 ASSYST PLUS 334 Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 331). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: Maintenance and care RService A in XX Days RService A Due RService A Overdue by XX Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, indicates the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnected. Maintaining the time-dependent service schedule: X Note down the service due date displayed in the multifunction display before disconnecting the battery. or X After reconnecting the battery, subtract the battery disconnection periods from the service date shown on the display. Hiding a service message X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel. Displaying service messages X X Switch on the ignition. Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu and confirm with a. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm with a. The service due date appears in the multifunction display. X Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display has been inadvertently reset, this setting can be corrected at a qualified specialist workshop. Have service work carried out as described in the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise lead to increased wear and damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Special service requirements The specified maintenance interval takes only the normal operation of the vehicle into account. Under arduous operating conditions or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more frequently, for example: Rregular city driving with frequent intermediate stops Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel short distances Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter replaced or changed more frequently. Under arduous operating conditions, the tires must be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care General notes H Environmental note Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning cloths in an environmentally responsible manner. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of the following: rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents Rsolvents Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Do not touch the surfaces or protective films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper. You could otherwise scratch or damage the surfaces and protective film. Rdry, ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for retaining the quality in the long term. Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Washing the vehicle and cleaning the paintwork Automatic car wash G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until full braking power is restored. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless Automatic Car Wash as these use special cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can damage the paintwork or plastic parts. ! Make sure that: Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof are fully closed. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off (the OFF button has been pressed). Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position 0. Rthe 360° camera or rear view camera is switched off. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. ! Make sure that the automatic transmission is in neutral position N when washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ROperating with the SmartKey: Do not remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Do not open the driver's door Z Maintenance and care Driving abroad 335 Care Maintenance and care 336 when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. ROperating with the Start/Stop button: Do not open the driver's door when the engine is switched off or at very low speeds. Otherwise, when in transmission position D or R the automatic transmission will automatically switch to park position P and block the wheels. Observe the following to make sure that the automatic transmission stays in position N neutral: Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Make sure that the ignition is switched on. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. Operating with the Start/Stop button only: Engage park position P. Release the brake pedal. X Remove Start/Stop button from ignition lock (Y page 146). X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Switch on the ignition. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X X Operating with the SmartKey and Start/Stop button: X Shift to neutral N. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake, if necessary. X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash from the very start. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax from the windshield and the wiper blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the windshield. Washing by hand In some countries, washing by hand is only allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in each country. X Do not use hot water and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. X Use a soft sponge to clean. X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gentle jet of water. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet. X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry thoroughly with a chamois. X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paintwork. Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as soon as possible when driving in winter. Power washers G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtires Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors ! If the SmartKey is within the rear detection If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint surface, use the paint care products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately every three to five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used. Do not use these care products in the sun or on the hood while the hood is hot. X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB TouchUp Stick, to repair slight damage to the paintwork quickly and provisionally. ! Edition 1 special model: parts of your vehi- Matte finish care Rlights Rseals Rtrim Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. range of KEYLESS-GO, the following situations, for example, could lead to the unintentional opening of the trunk: Rusing a car wash Rusing a power washer Make sure that the SmartKey is at least 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. cle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-wrapped parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high pressure cleaner. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the power washer nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Cleaning the paintwork ! Do not affix: Rstickers Rfilms Rmagnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine. ! The following may cause the paint to become shiny and thus reduce the matte effect: Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork with unsuitable materials Rfrequent use of automatic car washes Rwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable surface damage (shiny, mottled areas). Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax treatment under any circumstances. Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Use only insect remover and car shampoo from the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care products. Z 337 Maintenance and care Care 338 Care Cleaning the vehicle parts Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tires or chassis components replaced immediately. Maintenance and care ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you should drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. Cleaning the windows G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, solvents or cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain circumstances pre- vent water from draining away. This can lead to corrosion damage and damage to electronic components. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that is recommended and approved by MercedesBenz. Cleaning wiper blades G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper blade could be damaged. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield (Y page 126). X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition. Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic light lenses. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Care 339 Cleaning the mirror turn signals ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn signals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning cloths. Cleaning AIRPANEL washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Vehicles with AIRPANEL have shutters in the radiator trim. If the vehicle is very dusty, the adjustment range of the shutters may be restricted. The actuation mechanics of the radiator trim must then be cleaned with a power washer. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Shutters : open automatically after approximately 120 seconds. X Clean the location points of shutters ; in the radiator trim with a power washer. X Cleaning the sensors ! If you clean the sensors with a power washer, make sure that you keep a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. X Clean sensors : of the driving systems with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera and 360° camera ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area around the rear view camera or 360°camera with a high-pressure water jet. Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Open the camera cover for cleaning via the multimedia system (see separate operating instructions). X To clean the camera: use clean water and a soft cloth to clean camera lens :. X 360°camera: if you drive at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) or with the key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically. Z Maintenance and care ! If you clean the sensors with a power 340 Care Cleaning the exhaust pipes G WARNING The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. Always be particularly careful around the exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow these components to cool down before touching them. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acidbased cleaning agents, such as bathroom cleaner or wheel cleaner. Maintenance and care ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers should not be polished with a chrome polish. They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed with a lightly oiled cloth after every car wash. Commercially available engine and care oils are suitable for this. For heavier soiling, you can apply a fine paintwork polish with a microfiber cloth. Remove the excess polish residue after polishing. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth. X Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. As a result, plastic parts may come loose in the event of air bag deployment. There is a risk of injury. Do not use any care products and cleaning agents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather care agents that have been recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning genuine wood and trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes Care ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and can lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning the trim pieces. If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Trim elements with piano black finish: clean with a soft, damp cloth and a commercially available soap solution. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the seat covers General notes ! Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers made out of real leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage the cover. Note that regular care is essential to ensure that the appearance and comfort of the covers is retained over time. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning instructions: RClean genuine leather covers carefully with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ROnly use leather care agents that have been tested and approved by MercedesBenz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Rdifferences in the texture caused by growth and injury Rslight nuances of color These are characteristics of leather and not material defects. Rmarks Seat covers of other materials ! Observe the following when cleaning: Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80 †) or in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution. Cleaning the headliner and carpets Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Z Maintenance and care or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. 341 342 Where will I find...? Where will I find...? Notes on the reflective safety jackets Reflective safety jacket Breakdown assistance Removing/stowing the reflective safety jackets The reflective safety jackets are located in the safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the front doors. There are also safety jacket compartments in the stowage compartments of the rear doors, in which reflective safety jackets can be stowed. X To remove: pull out safety jacket bag : with the reflective safety jacket by loop ;. X Open safety jacket bag : and pull out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in safety jacket bag :. X Slide safety jacket bag : along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety jacket compartment. Meanwhile, ensure that loop ; hangs out well within reach. i Remove a new reflective safety jacket from its packaging material before sliding it into the safety jacket compartment. The packaging material may otherwise cause it to slip out or make removing it difficult. Observe the legal requirements in each country. : ; = ? A B C Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not use a laundry dryer Do not dry-clean This is a class 2 vest RThe reflective safety jackets meet the require- ments defined by the legal standard only if: - the correct size is used, and - the reflective safety jackets are fastened correctly. REnsure before use that the reflective safety jackets are clean and intact. The special properties may otherwise be compromised. RThe reflective safety jackets should be stored in their original packaging in a dry place away from sources of heat and light. RThe maximum number of washes specified is not the only factor influencing the life span of the reflective safety jackets. Their life span also depends on use, care, storage, etc. RThe reflective safety jackets should be disposed of and replaced with new ones: - after 15 washes, and/or - if the reflective strips have become scratched, and/or - if the backing material and/or reflective strips have become soiled and cannot be cleaned off, and/or - the fluorescence of a reflective safety vest has faded e.g. due to the effects of sunlight RDispose of reflective safety jackets in an environmentally responsible manner. To do so, contact your local waste disposal company. Vehicle tool kit General notes In vehicles with MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) and on PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles, the towing eye is in a bracket under the parcel shelf. Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. Some tools for changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tire changing tools are required and approved to perform a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tools required for changing a wheel may include, for example: RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench RRatchet wrench RAlignment bolt Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit : Tire inflation compressor ; Tire sealant filler bottle = Towing eye X X Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315). Flat tire Preparing the vehicle Your vehicle may be equipped with: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 343) Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehicles with MOExtended tires Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 343) Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Information on changing and mounting wheels (Y page 379). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X If possible, bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 149). X Make sure that the passengers are not endangered as they do so. Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) General notes With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one 343 Breakdown assistance Flat tire 344 Flat tire or more tires. The affected tire must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking next to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index (Y page 374). MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the multifunction display: Robserve the instructions sages (Y page 280). Rcheck the tire for damage. driving on, observe the following notes. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km). In addition to the vehicle load, the driving distance possible depends upon: Rvehicle speed Rroad condition Routside temperature The driving distance possible in run-flat mode may be reduced by extreme driving conditions or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a moderate style of driving. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is counted from the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). When replacing one or all tires, please observe the following specifications for your vehicle's tires: Rsize Rthe type and Rthe "MOExtended" mark If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be used as a temporary measure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. Rif Breakdown assistance in the display mes- winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes G WARNING When driving in emergency mode, the driving characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when cornering, accelerating quickly and when braking. There is a risk of an accident. Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Stop driving in emergency mode if: Ryou hear banging noises. vehicle starts to shake. Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Rthe RESP® is intervening constantly. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. After driving in emergency mode, have the wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. TIREFIT kit Important safety notes TIREFIT is a tire sealant. You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe Flat tire Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: Do not remove any foreign objects which have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation compressor from the stowage well underneath the trunk floor (Y page 343). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tire. X RRinse ! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Remove filler hose B and connector = from the bottom section of the tire inflation compressor housing ;. X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into the mounting on yellow cap A of tire sealant filler bottle : until the connector engages. X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow cap A of tire sealant filler bottle : into the mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. The cap must engage in both hooks. X Using the TIREFIT kit Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty tire. X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. X X Insert connector = into a socket in your vehicle. Cigarette lighter socket: (Y page 319) Z Breakdown assistance off the tire sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 345 Breakdown assistance 346 Flat tire 12 V socket: (Y page 319) Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter (Y page 319). Observe the notes on sockets (Y page 319). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Press on and off switch ? on the tire inflation compressor to ON. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If a pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure reached" (Y page 346). If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 346). If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if possible. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Note that tire sealant may escape when you unscrew the filler hose. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). G WARNING If the required tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure reached G WARNING A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's field of vision. ! Residue from the tire sealant may come out of the filler hose after use. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained after ten minutes: X X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Battery (vehicle) 347 Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. X Pull away immediately. X Stop after driving for approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure with the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X G WARNING i In cases such as the one mentioned above, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the tire inflation compressor, press together the locking tabs on the yellow cap. Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. The filler hose remains attached to the tire sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tire changed there. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. X Battery (vehicle) 12 V battery – important safety notes PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped with a 12 V battery and a high-voltage battery. The following notes refer to the 12 V battery. Notes on the high-voltage battery can be obtained in the "High-voltage battery – important safety notes" section (Y page 349). Special tools and expert knowledge are required when working on the battery, e.g. removal and installation. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING X To reduce the tire pressure: depress pressure release button : next to pressure gauge ;. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire. X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the sealed tire. X Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the Z Breakdown assistance If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. 348 Battery (vehicle) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. You should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Breakdown assistance Rin For further information about ABS and ESP®, see (Y page 68) and (Y page 73). All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery: G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing electrostatic build-up. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when charging the battery as well as when jump-starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for example: Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Rif you push or pull the battery across the carpet or other synthetic materials Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. All vehicles: H Environmental note Batteries contain dangerous substances. It is against the law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or a special collection point for used batteries. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist workshop for more information. ! Always have work on batteries carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery yourself, observe the following: Rsecure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. Rswitch off the ignition. Ralways disconnect the negative terminal clamp first, followed by the positive terminal clamp. After the battery has been disconnected, the transmission is locked in position P. After the work has been done, install the battery and replace the cover of the positive terminal clamp firmly. Comply with safety precautions and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and faceguard. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Contact a physician if necessary. Wear eye protection. Keep children away. Observe this Operator's Manual. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. In order for the battery to achieve the maximum possible service life, it must always be sufficiently charged. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist workshop. You can also charge the battery with a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery condition of charge checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical consumers. The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus conserving battery power. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the battery charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can also supply the 12 V battery. This only happens if the condition of charge of the 12 V battery requires this, e.g. after using electrical consumers for an extended period with the engine switched off. As the on-board voltage is continuously monitored this can also be performed when the engine is switched off. The condition of charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer period. High-voltage battery – important safety notes Only PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles are equipped with a high-voltage battery. G DANGER The vehicle's high-voltage electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system or touch damaged components, you may be electrocuted. The components in the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system may be Z 349 Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance 350 Battery (vehicle) damaged in an accident, although the damage is not visible. There is a risk of fatal injury. Following an accident, do not touch any highvoltage components and never modify the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system. Have the vehicle towed away after an accident and the vehicle's high-voltage electrical system checked by a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING G WARNING In the event of a vehicle fire, the internal pressure of the high-voltage battery can exceed a critical value. In this case flammable gas escapes through a ventilation valve on the underbody. The gas can ignite. There is a risk of injury. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger area at a suitable distance, whilst observing legal requirements. G WARNING If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. These are poisonous and caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. ! Exhaustive discharge caused by the vehicle standing idle for lengthy periods can damage the high-voltage battery. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods leave the high-voltage battery connected to a charging station. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a long period of time. Charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.4 V. All other vehicles: Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All vehicles: ! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 352). X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 352). Keep away from fire and open flames. Do not lean over a battery. Never charge the battery if it is still installed in the vehicle, unless you use a battery charger which has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by MercedesBenz is available as an accessory. It permits the Battery (vehicle) Breakdown assistance charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information and availability. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery: if the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: at low temperatures, do not charge a battery which has been removed using a battery charger. Allow the battery to warm up gently first, if necessary. Otherwise, the service life can be shortened and the starting characteristics impaired, especially at low temperatures. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if the battery charge is sufficient, the high-voltage battery can also supply the 12 V battery. This only happens if the condition of charge of the 12 V battery requires this, e.g. after using electrical consumers for an extended period with the engine switched off. As the on-board voltage is continuously monitored this can also be performed when the engine is switched off. The condition of charge of the 12 V battery and the on-board voltage are thereby kept stable for a longer period. 351 Z 352 Jump-starting Jump-starting For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine compartment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium-ion battery: G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention. G WARNING Breakdown assistance During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles: Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jumpstart the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 146). X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. X Open the hood. Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device. X Slide cover A of positive terminal : in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal : on your vehicle to positive terminal ; of donor battery B using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal : on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. Z 353 Breakdown assistance Jump-starting Towing and tow-starting 354 Connect negative terminal = of donor battery B to ground point ? of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point ? and negative terminal =, then from positive clamp : and positive terminal ;. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover A of positive terminal : after removing jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: if your vehicle has been jump-started, it may not be possible to use the electric drive for approximately 30 minutes. Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. X i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified Breakdown assistance specialist workshop. Towing and tow-starting G WARNING Important safety notes When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: G WARNING Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running. brake system or the power steering is malfunctioning. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. If your vehicle is being towed, much more force may be necessary to steer or brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, make sure that the steering moves freely. Rthe G WARNING You can no longer steer the vehicle if the steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch off the ignition when towing the vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. Rthe towing eye could detach itself vehicle/trailer combination could rollover. There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Rthe Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 387). ! When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash ! Make sure that the electric parking brake is released. If the electric parking brake is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Secure the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eye only. Otherwise, the vehicle could become damaged. ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery. This could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, have the vehicle recovered using a crane. Towing and tow-starting ! When towing, pull away slowly and smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! Shift the automatic transmission to N and do not open the driver's or front passenger's door during towing. The automatic transmission may otherwise shift to position P, which could damage the transmission. 355 longer distances, have the vehicle loaded and transported. Installing/removing the towing eye Installing the towing eye ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed away. If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage, have it transported on a transporter or trailer. The automatic transmission must be in position N when the vehicle is being towed. If the automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position N, have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. The battery must be connected and charged. Otherwise, you: Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock Rcannot release the electric parking brake Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to position N Disarm the automatic locking feature before the vehicle is towed (Y page 89). You could otherwise be locked out when pushing or towing the vehicle. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles may not be towed away but must instead be transported, if: Rthe multifunction display is not working or Rthe á Towing Not Permitted See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction display If the vehicle is in a dangerous area, it can be towed out of that area with both axles on the ground. In this case, the towing distance must not be greater than 165 ft (50 m) and must not exceed a towing speed of 6 mph (10 km/h). For The brackets for the screw-in towing eye are located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and at the front, under covers :. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 343). X Press the mark on cover : inwards and remove. X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten it. Removing the towing eye Unscrew and remove the towing eye. Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Put the towing eye back into the vehicle tool kit. X X Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed with the rear axle raised. PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles: towing the vehicle away with the rear axle raised should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. Z Breakdown assistance ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of Towing and tow-starting 356 ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic transmission ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be towed with the rear axle raised. The vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise swerve or even roll over. Breakdown assistance Towing a vehicle with both axles on the ground The automatic transmission automatically shifts to position P when you open the driver's or frontpassenger door or when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing the vehicle, you must observe the following points: X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the electric parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps (Y page 120). In order to signal a change of direction when towing the vehicle with the hazard warning lamps switched on, use the combination switch as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X ! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the front and rear axles must be stationary and on the same transportation vehicle. Positioning over the connection point of the transport vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may otherwise be damaged. All vehicles ! You may only secure the vehicle by the wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter for transporting purposes. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Secure the vehicle. X Transporting the vehicle PLUG-IN HYBRID vehicles Transportation of the vehicle should only be carried out by professional recovery companies. Notes on 4MATIC vehicles ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. Fuses Tow-starting (emergency engine starting) ! Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could otherwise damage the automatic transmission. i You can find information on "Jump-starting" under (Y page 352). Fuses Important safety notes G WARNING If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric cables could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with the specified new fuses having the correct amperage. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart. The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the trunk (Y page 357). If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system concerned. Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses. The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the components on the circuit and their functions stop operating. Before changing a fuse Observe the important safety notes (Y page 357) X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 177). X Switch off the engine. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS‑GO X Open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. The driver’s door can be closed again. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: RFuse box on the driver's side of the dashboard RFuse box in the front-passenger footwell RFuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side RFuse box under the trunk floor on the righthand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel Dashboard fuse box ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw- driver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. Z Breakdown assistance Vehicles with 4MATIC may either be towed away with both axles on the ground or be loaded up and transported. If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is damaged, have the vehicle transported on a truck or trailer. In the event of damage to the electrical system: if the battery is defective, the automatic transmission will be locked in position P. To shift the automatic transmission to position N, you must provide power to the vehicle's electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 352). Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or trailer. 357 Fuses 358 Open the driver's door. To open: pull out cover : slightly at the bottom in the direction of arrow =. X Fold cover : outwards in the direction of arrow ;. X X Breakdown assistance X Open the hood (Y page 330). To open: press safety clips : on the cover together. X Remove fuse box cover ; upwards. X X To close: fold in cover : until it engages. Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X Loosen screws =, fold up fuse box lid ? and remove it. X To close: check whether the seal is positioned correctly in the lid ?. X Insert lid ? into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. X Fold down lid ? of the fuse box and tighten screws =. X X X X X Open the front-passenger door. To open: fold cover : out towards the rear and remove it. To close: clip in cover : at the rear. Fold cover : forwards until it engages. Fuse box in the engine compartment G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood. Insert cover ; on both sides and engage safety clips :. X Close the hood. X Fuses 359 Fuse box in the trunk Open the trunk lid. Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 315). X To open: swing cover : upwards in the direction of the arrow. X X To close: fold down cover : in the opposite direction to the arrow. Make sure that the cover is in the recess provided for it. Breakdown assistance X i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. You can find the corresponding fuse rating and fuse type on the fuse allocation chart. Z 360 Operation Important safety notes G WARNING If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to use the correct: Rdesignation Rmodel Operation When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Information on driving Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rmodel Wheels and tires Further information regarding wheels and tires can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 384). You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Information on tire pressure can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370) Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 165) Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 363) G WARNING A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Rdo not drive with a flat tire. replace the flat tire with your emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rimmediately Rpay attention to the information and warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics). Accessories that are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used correctly can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip. While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. When parking your vehicle, make sure that the tires do not get deformed by the curb or other obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tires. Notes on high performance tires G WARNING Due to the special tire tread in combination with the optimized rubber compound, there is an increased risk of hydroplaning and skidding on a damp or wet road surface. tire grip is also noticeably reduced at low outside temperatures and low tire operating temperatures. There is a risk of an accident. Operation i Different driving styles may lead to high tire wear and the tires may reach the minimum tire tread depth after only a short time. Regular checking of wheels and tires G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Check wheels and tires for damage at least once a month. Check wheels and tires after driving off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular attention to damage such as: Rcuts in the tires Rpunctures Rtears in the tires Rbulges on tires Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels Regularly check the tire tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of the tire (Y page 361). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 363). The service life of tires depends, among other things, on the following factors: Rdriving style Rtire pressure Rdistance covered Notes on tire tread G WARNING Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. Minimum tire tread depth for: RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) tires: ã in (4 mm) For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tire tread depth is reached. RM+S Wheels and tires Turn on ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. When the outside temperature falls below 10 †, use M+S tires. 361 Marking : shows where the bar indicator (arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire tread. Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be replaced. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same type and make. Z 362 Winter operation Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach their full performance after this distance. RDo not drive with tires which have too little tread depth, as this significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for this type of damage. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. M+S tires Wheels and tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure monitor and on wheels specifically tested by MercedesBenz. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 343). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Winter operation General notes Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 379). Driving with summer tires At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summer tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle G WARNING M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are identified by the M+S marking. Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. Only these tires will allow driving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® to function optimally in winter. These tires have been developed specifically for driving in snow. Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all wheels to maintain safe handling characteristics. Always observe the maximum permissible speed specified for the M+S tires you have mounted. When you have mounted the M+S tires: X Check the tire pressures (Y page 366). X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367). X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367). X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 369). Tire pressure G WARNING If snow chains are installed to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever install snow chains to the front wheels Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you mount snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before mounting the snow chains. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding standard of quality. For more information, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear the following points in mind: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheeltire combinations (Y page 384). ROnly use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. Remove the snow chains as soon as possible when you come to a road that is not snow-covered. RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. RDo not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). ROn vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive at raised vehicle level if snow chains have been installed (Y page 196). RWhen snow chains are installed, never use Active Parking Assist (Y page 202). You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pulling away with snow chains installed: RAll vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles) (Y page 74) RMercedes‑AMG vehicles (Y page 74) You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force (cutting action). Tire pressure Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and check the pressure of all the tires including the spare wheel: Rmonthly, at least the load changes Rbefore beginning a long journey Runder different operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tire pressure. Rif The data on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table shown here are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle. General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Z Wheels and tires Snow chains 363 364 Tire pressure Tire and Loading Information placard : Recommended tire pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370). The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ. Wheels and tires Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see illustration (example). The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for that tire size; see illustration (example). Some tire pressure tables show only the rim diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire sidewall (Y page 374). If the tire pressures have been set to the lower values for lighter loads and/or lower road speeds, the pressures should be reset to the higher values: Rif you want to drive with an increased load and/or Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. RCheck the tire for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with the electronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure can be checked in the on-board computer. The tire temperature and pressure increase when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent on the driving speed and the load. Therefore, you should only correct tire pressures when the tires are cold. The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the pressure of warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the current operating conditions. If you check the tire pressure when the tires are warm, the resulting value will be higher than if the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire pressure to the value specified for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for cold tires: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap (Y page 165) Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflated tires G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Underinflated tires may: Roverheat, leading to tire defects affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption Radversely Overinflated tires G WARNING Tires with excessively high pressure can burst because they are damaged more easily by road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires, including the spare wheel. Z Wheels and tires Important notes on tire pressure 365 366 Tire pressure Overinflated tires may: Rincrease the braking distance Radversely affect handling Rwear excessively and/or unevenly Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rbe more susceptible to damage Maximum tire pressures Wheels and tires : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- sure Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (Y page 363). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Checking the tire pressures Important safety notes Observe the notes on tire pressure (Y page 363). Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 165) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Checking tire pressures manually To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. X Read the tire pressure and compare it to the recommended value on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table (Y page 363). X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, using the tip of a pen for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure checker. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Tire pressure loss warning system General notes While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appear in the multifunction display. You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press 'OK' to Restart message which appears in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Information on the message display can be found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 367). Important safety notes The tire pressure warning system does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 363). The tire pressure loss warning does not replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several tires at the Tire pressure Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if you have: Rchanged the tire pressure Rchanged the wheels or tires Rmounted new wheels or tires X Before restarting, make sure that the tire pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. The recommended tire pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar. Additionally, a tire pressure table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning system can only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 363). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to Restart message appears in the multifunction display. X If you wish to confirm the restart: Press the a button. The Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears in the multifunction display. X Press 9 or : to select Yes. X Press the a button. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set tire pressures of all four tires. X If you wish to cancel the restart: X or Press the % button. If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message appears, press 9 or : to select Can‐ cel. X Press the a button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. X Tire pressure monitor General notes If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure monitor warns you if the pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only functions if the corresponding sensors are installed in all wheels. Information on tire pressures is displayed in the multifunction display. After a few minutes of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display; see illustration (example). Z Wheels and tires same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. The function of the tire pressure loss warning system is limited or delayed if: Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cornering at high speeds or driving with high rates of acceleration). Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the vehicle or on the roof). 367 368 Tire pressure For information on the message display, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 369). Wheels and tires Important safety notes G WARNING Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least once every two weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale lights up, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to that recommended for cold tires which is suitable for the operating situation (Y page 363). Note that the correct tire pressure for the current operating situation must first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the warning threshold for the warning message is aligned to the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjusting the pressure of the cold tires (Y page 369). The current pressures are saved as new reference values. As a result, a warning message will appear if the tire pressure drops significantly. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire pressure (Y page 363). The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering movements. Tire pressure Checking the tire pressure electronically Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the multifunction display. If the vehicle was parked for longer than 20 minutes, the following message appears: Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure monitor automatically detects new wheels or new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure value to the individual wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active message is shown instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressures are already being monitored. X Tire pressure monitor warning messages If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure loss in one or more tires, a warning message is shown in the multifunction display. The yellow tire pressure warning lamp then lights up. RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire pressure must be corrected when the opportunity arises. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped significantly. The tires must be checked. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire has dropped suddenly. The tires must be checked. Observe the instructions and safety notes in the display messages in the "Tires" section (Y page 280). If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated, the tire pressures may be displayed for the wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. Restarting the tire pressure monitor When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all existing warning messages are deleted and the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the currently set tire pressures as the reference values Z Wheels and tires The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is significantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is not malfunctioning. Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a minute and then remains lit constantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. In addition to the warning lamp, a message appears in the multifunction display. Observe the information on display messages (Y page 280). It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A malfunction will be indicated by the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for approximately one minute and then remaining lit. When the malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of driving. The tire pressure values indicated by the onboard computer may differ from those measured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. 369 Loading the vehicle Wheels and tires 370 for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. However, you can also define reference values manually as described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. X Set the tire pressure to the value recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver's side B-pillar (Y page 363). You can find more tire pressure values for various operating conditions in the tire pressure table inside the fuel filler flap (Y page 363). X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Use ò on the steering wheel to call up the list of menus. X Press 9 or : on the steering wheel to select the Service menu. X Press the a button. X Press 9 or : to select Tire Pres‐ sure. X Press the a button. The current tire pressure for each wheel or the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message will be displayed in the multifunction display. X Press the : button. The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐ erence Values message appears in the multifunction display. If you wish to confirm the restart: X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted message appears in the multifunction display. After driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tire pressures are within the specified range. The new tire pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the Bpillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the front and rear axle. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed the maximum load or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. If you wish to cancel the restart: X Press the % button. The tire pressure values stored at the last restart will continue to be monitored. : B-pillar, driver's side Loading the vehicle Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating 371 i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehiclespecific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Determining the correct load limit Specification for maximum gross vehicle weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading Information placard: "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage must not exceed the specified value. X i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Number of seats The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4. Maximum number of seats : indicates the maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Z Wheels and tires Step-by-step instructions 372 Loading the vehicle Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 370). The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Step 1 Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 3 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Rear: 2 Front: 1 Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Gross weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 150 lbs (68 kg) = 1350 lbs (612 kg) Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Wheels and tires Step 2 Step 3 Permissible load (maxi- 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò mum gross vehicle 750 lbs (340 kg) = weight rating from the 750 lbs (340 kg) Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo carefully, you should still make sure that the gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 370). Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maximum permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehicle weight and maximum gross axle weight rating), have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable) weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge. All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Overview of Tire Quality Grading Standards sponding quality grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. Example: RTreadwear grade: 200 RTraction grade: AA RTemperature grade: A All passenger car tires must conform to the statutory safety requirements in addition to these grades. i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction G WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S. government specifications. Their purpose is to provide drivers with uniform reliable information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corre- ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to the drive train. The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Z Wheels and tires Vehicle identification plate 373 374 All about wheels and tires The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freezing point. Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires. Observe the legally required minimum tire tread depth (Y page 361). Winter tires can reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with snow. Take appropriate care when driving. Further information on winter tires (M+S tires) (Y page 362). Tire labeling Overview Temperature G WARNING Wheels and tires The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard (Y page 378) ; DOT, Tire Identification Number (Y page 377) Maximum tire load (Y page 376) Maximum tire pressure (Y page 366) Manufacturer Tire material (Y page 377) Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating (Y page 374) D Load index (Y page 376) E Tire name = ? A B C The markings described above are on the tire in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity and speed rating G WARNING Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the All about wheels and tires : ; = ? A B Tire width Nominal aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load bearing index Speed rating General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may not contain any letters or may contain one letter that precedes the size description. If there is no letter preceding the size description (as shown above): these are passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing standards. If "T" precedes the size description: compact emergency wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire width in millimeters. Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio between the tire height and tire width and is shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370). Example: Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear. For further information on the maximum tire load in kilograms and lbs, see (Y page 376). For further information on the load bearing index, see "Load index" (Y page 376). Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Regardless of the speed rating, always observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in Z Wheels and tires tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 375 All about wheels and tires 376 Wheels and tires the size description, depending on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). The service specification is made up of loadbearing index A and speed rating B. RIf the size description of your tire includes "ZR" and there are no service specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out the maximum speed. If a service specification is available, the maximum speed is limited according to the speed rating in the service specification. Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is the service specification. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum speed. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) V i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also have the i snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. They have been especially developed for driving on snow. An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. 1 Or M+S i for winter tires. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 384). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, load index : may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. You will find this after the letter that identifies the speed rating (Y page 374). RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the example above), represents a standard load (SL) tire RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire RLight Load: represents a light load tire RC, D, E: represents a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Maximum load rating All about wheels and tires Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 370). i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) 377 Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A provides information about the age of a tire. The first and second positions represent the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in 2008. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Tire characteristics This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The TIN is a unique identification number. The TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safetyrelevant matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the affected tires. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and manufacturing date A. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : marks that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; provides details on the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. For further information about retreaded tires, see (Y page 384). Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example. Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire ply composition and material used Describes the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon, polyester and other materials. Bar Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. DOT (Department of Transportation) DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the U S Department of Transportation. Normal occupant weight The number of occupants for which the vehicle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs). Z Wheels and tires US tire regulations stipulate that every tire manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced. 378 All about wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer following specifications from the U.S. government. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressures Maximum loaded vehicle weight The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. The Tire and Loading Information placard contains the recommended tire pressures for cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maximum permissible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommended pressures for cold tires for various operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. The maximum weight is the sum of: Rthe curb weight of the vehicle Rthe weight of the accessories Rthe load limit Rthe weight of the factory installed optional equipment Wheels and tires Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment The combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is mounted. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight rating. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which the tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accessories installed, occupants, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. Load index In addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity more precisely. Curb weight The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipment if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum load rating The maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by two. Changing a wheel PSI (pounds per square inch) Load bearing index A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Aspect ratio Relationship between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure This is pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to each square inch of the tire's surface. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. 379 Traction Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. Treadwear indicators Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Cold tire pressure Occupant distribution The tires are cold: Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours and Rif the vehicle has not been driven further than 1 mile (1.6 km) The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions. Total load limit Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. The part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Changing a wheel Bead Flat tire The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from the wheel rim. Sidewall The part of the tire between the tread and the bead. The "Breakdown assistance" section (Y page 343) contains information and notes on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driving with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 343). Weight of optional extras Rotating the wheels The combined weight of those optional extras that weigh more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may severely impair the driving characteristics if the wheels or tires have different dimensions. The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. TIN (Tire Identification Number) This is a unique identifier which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example for a product recall, and thus identify the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Z Wheels and tires Tread Wheels and tires 380 Changing a wheel Tire-mounting tools should not be used near the valve. This could damage the electronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Always observe the instructions and safety notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section (Y page 380). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires differ, depending on the operating conditions. Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in the center. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km). Earlier may be necessary, depending on the degree of tire wear. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 367) or the tire pressure monitor (Y page 369). Direction of rotation Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning. These advantages can only be gained if the tires are installed corresponding to the direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its correct direction of rotation. Mounting a wheel Preparing the vehicle Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Make sure that the vehicle level is set to "Normal" on vehicles with AIRMATIC (Y page 196). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 146). X Make sure that the engine cannot be started via your smartphone (Y page 149). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. X Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Storing wheels Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it can be found in the tire-change tool kit (Y page 343). The folding wheel chock is an additional safety measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling away, for example when changing a wheel. Fold both plates upwards :. Fold out lower plate ;. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the openings in base plate =. X X X Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Raising the vehicle G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restricted height. RMake sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). RNever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. RDo not lie under the vehicle. RDo not start the engine when the vehicle is raised. RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lid when the vehicle is raised. RMake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove the hub cap. Two different variants can be installed. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Observe the following when raising the vehicle: RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe- cific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It must not be used for performing maintenance work under the vehicle. RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and Vehicles with plastic hub cap: To remove: turn the center cover of hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove. X To install: before installing, ensure that hub cap : is in the open position. To do this, turn the center cover counter-clockwise. X Position hub cap : and turn the center cover clockwise until hub cap : engages physically and audibly. X Make sure that hub cap : is installed securely. X Z 381 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Changing a wheel Wheels and tires 382 Vehicles with aluminum hub cap: X To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench = from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 343). X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Position lug wrench = on socket ;. X Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : counter-clockwise and remove it. X To install: before installing, check hub cap : and the wheel area for soiling and clean if necessary. X Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in the right position. X Position socket ; on hub cap :. X Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and tighten hub cap :. The tightening torque must be 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). i Note that the hub cap should be tightened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist workshop. X Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers installed next to the jacking points on the outer sills. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ? upwards. X Position jack B at jacking point A. Changing a wheel 383 Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Mounting a new wheel G WARNING Make sure the foot of the jack is directly beneath the jacking point. Turn crank C clockwise until jack B sits completely on jacking point A. The base of the jack must lie evenly on the ground. X Turn crank C until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. X Removing a wheel ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic- brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when you screw them in. When mounting/removing wheels, and for as long as the wheels are removed, avoid applying any external force on the brake disks. This could impair the level of comfort when braking. Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 379). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic- brake disc: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore, you should proceed carefully and get a second person assist to you. Alternatively, you can use a second alignment bolt. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. Z Wheels and tires X Wheel-tire combination 384 Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fingertight. X Unscrew the alignment bolt. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. X Wheels and tires Lowering the vehicle G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools in the trunk again. X Mercedes-AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: insert the cover into the outer sill. X Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Observe the recommended tire pressure (Y page 363). When you are driving with the collapsible spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning system or the tire pressure monitor cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor when the defective wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure control system: all installed wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Wheel-tire combination You can ask for information regarding permitted wheel-tire combinations at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- mends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®, and are marked as follows: RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tires) Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may only be used on wheels that have been specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimension variations could cause the tires to come into contact Wheel-tire combination 385 with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tires, wheels or accessories other than those tested and approved. Information on tires, wheels and approved combinations can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- Wheels and tires ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. The recommended pressures for various operating conditions can be found: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 363). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle (left and right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 343). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Z 386 Vehicle electronics Information regarding technical data i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels. Vehicle electronics Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING In particular, the following conditions must be complied with: Ronly approved wavebands may be used. Rcompliance with the maximum permissible output in these wavebands is required. Ronly approved antenna positions may be used. Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation may cause damage to your health and the health of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into account current scientific discussions relating to the possible health hazards that may result from electromagnetic fields. The electromagnetic radiation from modified or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work to electrical and electronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from incorrectly operated RF transmitters can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example: Technical data Rif the RF transmitter is not connected with an exterior antenna Rthe exterior antenna has been installed incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type This can compromise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior antenna mounted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them with the low-reflection exterior antenna. ! The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of RF transmitters are not observed. Approved antenna positions : Front roof area ; Rear roof area = Rear fender ? Trunk lid i On vehicles with panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof area is not permitted. On the rear fenders, it is recommended to position the antenna on the side of the vehicle closest to the center of the road. Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment). Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply or antenna connections intended for use with the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions when installing. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or antenna positions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz. Identification plates Waveband Maximum transmission output Short wave 3 - 54 MHz 100 W 4 m waveband 74 - 88 MHz 30 W 2 m waveband 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Trunked radio/Tetra 380 - 460 MHz 10 W 70 cm waveband 400 - 460 MHz 35 W Mobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 10 W Identification plates Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) X The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio/Tetra) RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G) There is no restriction for antenna positions on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTrunked radio/Tetra R70 cm waveband R2G/3G/4G Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) ; VIN = Vehicle model Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; VIN = Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identification plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate Z Technical data The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the following values: 387 Service products and filling capacities 388 from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering ; upwards. The VIN is visible :. X The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 387). The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of the windshield (Y page 388). Dispose of service products in an environmentally responsible manner. Service products include the following: RFuels RLubricants RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid control system refrigerant Components and service products must be matched. Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of products which have not been recommended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appropriate section. Information on tested and approved products can be obtained at an authorized MercedesBenz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. RClimate Technical data Engine number : Engine number (stamped into the crank- case) ; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) = Emission control information plate, includ- ing the certification of both federal and Californian emissions standards (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Service products and filling capacities Other identifications, for example: R0 W-30 R5 W-30 R5 W-40 Fuel 389 Tank capacity Model Total capacity C 350 e 13.2 US gal (50.0 l) All other models 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Important safety notes Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Model Of which reserve Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l) All other models Approx. 1.8 US gal (7.0 l) Gasoline Fuel grade ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! Only refuel using unleaded premium grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol. Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. ! Do not use the following: RE15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol) (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RE100 (100% ethanol) RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) RGasoline with metalliferous additives RDiesel RE85 Z Technical data G WARNING 390 Service products and filling capacities Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. ! To ensure the longevity and full perform- ance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used. If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline of a lower grade, observe the following precautions: ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3,000 rpm. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label on the pump, ask the staff for assistance. Technical data i For further information, consult a qualified specialist workshop or visit http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). C 300 4MATIC: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON. All other models: as a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, you may also use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. Information on refueling (Y page 165). Additives ! Operating the engine with fuel additives added later can lead to engine failure. Do not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue buildup. gasoline must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use branded fuels that have additives. The quality of the fuel available in some countries may not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the injection system as a result. In such cases, and in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed with the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. Flexible Fuel vehicles Important safety notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. You must make sure that fuel does not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel vapors. Keep fuel away from children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance without delay. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with fuel. Service products and filling capacities i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Fuel consumption The energy content of E85 fuel is less than that of the same amount of premium-grade gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is therefore higher than with premium-grade gasoline. Maintenance Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center that you are operating or have operated the vehicle with E85 fuel. damage or damage to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil change. Otherwise, you may damage the engine and the exhaust gas aftertreatment. When handling engine oil, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 388). The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals. You should therefore only use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance systems. For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. The table shows which engine oils have been approved for your vehicle. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Low outside temperatures Model If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ (0 †), the starting procedure can take noticeably longer when operating with E85 fuel. E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †). Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Engine oil General notes All other models MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 229.5 Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils for Mercedes‑AMG vehicles. i MB approval is indicated on the oil containers. Filling capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a specification other than is necessary to fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine Capacity Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 9.4 qt (9.0 l) C 300 C 350 e 7.4 qt (7.0 l) All other models 6.9 qt (6.5 l) Z Technical data Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline RE85 fuel Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade unleaded gasoline 391 392 Service products and filling capacities Additives ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. This could damage the engine. Brake fluid G WARNING Technical data The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 388). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MBApproval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop in accordance with the replacement intervals and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Coolant Important safety notes G WARNING If antifreeze comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Let the engine cool down before you add antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from components before starting the engine. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 388). The coolant is a mixture of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: Rcorrosion protection Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be dissipated as effectively. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance with MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1. i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. Service products and filling capacities nance interval at a qualified specialist workshop. Filling capacities Model Capacity C 400 4MATIC Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 11.5 US qt (10.9 l) Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 11.7 US qt (11.1 l) All other models 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Windshield/headlamp cleaning system Important safety notes G WARNING Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to At temperatures below freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. For the correct mixing ratio refer to the information on the antifreeze reservoir. i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum- merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. Climate control system refrigerant Important safety notes The climate control system of your vehicle is filled with refrigerant R‑134a. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant type used can be found on the radiator cross member. ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used. The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with any other PAG oil that is not approved for R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate control system may be damaged. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard J639, must be adhered to. Always have work on the climate control system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Refrigerant instruction label the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. When handling washer fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products (Y page 388). At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit. Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. Example: refrigerant instruction label : Warning symbol ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards Z Technical data i The coolant is checked with every mainte- 393 394 Vehicle data Dimensions and weights ? PAG oil part number A Type of refrigerant Warning symbol : advises you about: Rpossible dangers service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Rhaving Technical data Filling capacities Model Refrigerant C 350 e 23.6 ± 0.4 oz (670 ± 10 g) Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 21.5 ± 0.4 oz (610 ± 10 g) All other models 22.2 ± 0.4 oz (630 ± 10 g) Model PAG oil C 350 e Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 4.2 oz (120 g) All other models 2.8 oz (80 g) Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Roptional equipment reduces the maximum payload. Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Model : Opening height C 300 69.6 in (1768 mm) C 300 e 69.5 in (1765 mm) Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Mercedes‑AMG vehicles 68.8 in (1748 mm) All other models 69.8 in (1774 mm) Missing values were not available at time of going to print. Mercedes‑AMG vehicles Vehicle length 187.2 in (4756 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.5 in (2020 mm) Vehicle height 56.1 in (1426 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) Turning radius 37.0 ft (11.29 m) Maximum roof load 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load 220 lb (100 kg) Vehicle data 395 All other models Vehicle length, Mercedes‑Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 185.1 in (4702 mm) Vehicle length, all other models 184.5 in (4686 mm) Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 79.5 in (2020 mm) Wheelbase 111.8 in (2840 mm) Turning radius 36.8 ft (11.22 m) Maximum roof load, Mercedes‑Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Maximum roof load, all other models 165 lb (75 kg) Maximum trunk load, all other models 220 lb (100 kg) Model Vehicle height C 300 57.0 in (1447 mm) C 350 e 56.9 in (1444 mm) Mercedes-Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC 56.3 in (1429 mm) All other models 57.2 in (1452 mm) Technical data Maximum trunk load, Mercedes‑Benz C 450 AMG 4MATIC Z 396